512
TECHNICAL INSTITUTE V ERSION 1.0 BASIC MEASUREMENT T RAINING WORKBOOK FAROARMUSB JANUARY 2008 INSTRUCTORS BOOK CAM2 MEASURE

Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

VERSION 1.0BASIC MEASUREMENT TRAINING WORKBOOK

FAROARMUSBJANUARY 2008

INSTRUCTORS BOOK

CAM2MEASURE

Page 2: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 3: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

©FARO Technologies, Inc. 2008. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, or transmitted in any form or by any means without written permission of FARO Technologies Inc.

FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE FARO ARM AND ITS MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS.

IN NO EVENT SHALL FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE FARO ARM OR ITS MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.

The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of FARO Technologies Inc.

FaroArm® CAM2® SPC Graph® and SPC Process® are registered trademarks of FARO Technologies Inc.

Windows® and Excel® are registered trademarks of Microsoft, Inc.

DATAPAGE® is a registered trademark of Brown & Sharpe, Inc.

Pro/ENGINEER® is a registered trademark of Parametric Technology Corporation.

CATIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systemes.

Acrobat® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.

Rhinoceros® is a registered trademark of Robert McNeel & Associates

FARO Technologies Inc. Internal Control File Locations:F:\CONTROL\REFERENC\08PRODUC\ENGLISH\Prdpub13\08m13e10 - FARO USB Arm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Instructor - January 2008.pdfF:\CONTROL\RECORDS\05MANUFA\PARTSPEC\XH17-0360.pdf

Page 4: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 5: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

• Course Introduction:

• This course will explain DIRECT (Dimensional Inspection Reverse Engineering and Control Tool) applications of the FaroArm.

• This course is designed to provide the basic skills necessary to measure a part, check a part, and compare measurements to nominal CAD files.

• There will be lectures, as well as hands-on exercises that will allow the student to practice the skills learned.

Page 6: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 7: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

E

12

3

45

6

7

89

10F AC

D B

G

P1

P2

P3

P4

Page 8: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

S1

S2

Page 9: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

i

Course ChecklistChapter 1: Hardware Overview

❑ FaroArm Control Station❑ Setting up the FaroArm❑ Connecting the Computer

❑ Referencing the Encoders❑ FaroArm Handle Buttons❑ FaroArm Errors❑ Important Topics - Hardware Overview

Chapter 2: Hardware Overview Practical❑ Practical Exercise

Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X❑ Using this manual❑ Starting CAM2 Measure X❑ Screen Layout

❑ Graphics Field❑ DRO Window❑ Pull-down Menus❑ Toolbar Buttons❑ Output Control Bar❑ Status Bar❑ Control Bars

❑ CAM2 Measure X HELP❑ About CAM2

❑ Hotkeys - Viewing❑ Hotkeys - Viewing (on numeric keypad)❑ Shortcuts - Viewing (with the mouse)❑ Hotkeys - Commands❑ Important Topics - Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification❑ Calibration and Certification

❑ What is Calibration?❑ Certification

❑ Probe Calibration❑ XYZ Location❑ Probe Calibration Error

❑ Single Hole Method❑ Auxiliary Switch

❑ Important Topics - Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification

Page 10: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

ii

Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Probe Calibration❑ Calibrate Probe❑ Single Point Certification

Chapter 6: Feature Measurement❑ Types of Features

❑ 2D Features❑ 3D Features

❑ Compensation❑ Plane Compensation❑ Compensation of a 2D Feature

❑ Review Features❑ Printing❑ Erasing

❑ Important Topics - Feature MeasurementChapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical

❑ Practical Exercises❑ Execute Mode❑ View Control❑ Review Features

Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements❑ Coordinate Systems

❑ What is a Coordinate System?❑ Alignments❑ Feature Reducibility

❑ Feature Reducibility Exercise❑ Constructions

❑ What is a Construction?❑ Common Constructions

❑ Dimensions❑ What is a Dimension?❑ Tricky Dimensions

❑ Important Topics - Basic Part MeasurementChapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Setting the Alignment❑ Feature Measurements❑ Constructions

Page 11: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

iii

❑ Changing Labels from Review Features❑ Dimensions❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report❑ Save The Measurements❑ Additional Coordinate Systems❑ Switching between coordinate systems.❑ Save Again

Chapter 10: Checking a Part❑ Nominals

❑ What is a Nominal?❑ Types of Nominals❑ CAD to Part Alignments❑ CAD=Part

❑ Important Topics - Checking a PartChapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Getting the Nominals❑ Setting the Alignment❑ Save The Measurements❑ Measuring Features and Adding Nominals❑ Adding a Nominal through Review Features❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report❑ Save Again

Chapter 12: Move Device Position❑ Purpose

❑ Moving the Device❑ Realign the Part to the Device

❑ Important Topics - Move Device PositionChapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Importing CAD File❑ Setting the Coordinate System❑ Save The Measurements❑ Measure Features for the Move Device Position❑ Performing the Move Device Position Command

❑ Add Measurements to an Existing FeatureChapter 14: Tips and Tricks

❑ The Measurement Track❑ Examine the Task❑ Setup Considerations❑ Setting the Coordinate System and Alignment

Page 12: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

iv

❑ Data Collection❑ Data Output❑ Other Hints

Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD❑ Why Work with CAD?❑ CAD Terminology

❑ Types of CAD Data❑ Standard CAD Data File Formats

❑ IGES❑ 3DM❑ VDA

❑ Measurement Template❑ Iterative Alignment (Best Fit)❑ Automatic Nominal Association❑ Important Topics - Checking a Part With CAD

Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical❑ Practical Exercise

❑ Translating an IGES File❑ Measuring the Alignment Features❑ Setting an Iterative Alignment❑ Save The Measurements❑ Measure the Remaining Features❑ Modifying On-Screen Labels❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report❑ Save Again

Chapter 17: Surface Measurement❑ Why Measure a Surface?❑ Surface Measurement Commands

❑ Inspect Surface❑ Surface Edge Point❑ Surface Point❑ Home In Point

❑ Important Topics - Surface MeasurementChapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Translating and Adding the CAD data❑ Measuring and Creating an Alignment❑ CAD=Part❑ Save the Measurements❑ Checking a Surface❑ Checking an Edge

Page 13: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

v

❑ Using Home In Points❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report❑ Save Again

Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical❑ Practical Exercise

❑ Measuring and Creating an Alignment❑ CAD=Part❑ Scan Measurement Preference❑ Parallel Lock Planes❑ Show Surface Deviation❑ Rescale Whiskers❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report

Chapter 20: Point Measurement❑ Point Measurements

❑ Comp Off and Comp Axis❑ High Point and Low Point

❑ Surface Measurements❑ Important Topics - Point Measurement

Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical❑ PRACTICAL - Surface Measurement

❑ Measuring the Alignment Features❑ Constructing the Alignment❑ High Points❑ Home-in Options❑ Three Coordinates, Key-in I, J, K❑ Three Coordinates, Select Surface❑ Three Coordinates, Sample Surface❑ Save the Home In File❑ Measure the Home In Points

Chapter 22: Sheet Metal Measurement❑ Sheet Metal Measurements

❑ Simple Features❑ Unique Sheet Metal Measurements❑ Surface Points

❑ CAD Side and Other Side❑ Dynamic Nominals

❑ Important Facts - Sheet Metal and Fixture MeasurementChapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement

Practical❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE

❑ Constructing Nominals

Page 14: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

vi

❑ Using the Measurement Template❑ Iterative Alignment❑ Compare to Straight Nominal Edge❑ Compare Nominal Circles❑ Compare Nominal Round Slots❑ Compare Nominal Surfaces

Chapter 24: Round Tubing❑ Tubing Part Preferences❑ Measure Tube

❑ Round Tube❑ Rectangular Tube❑ Tube Fitting

❑ Construct Tube❑ Enter XYZ❑ Enter PTB❑ From Features❑ Breakpoints❑ Importing Data

❑ Tube Reporting❑ Tube Correction Report

❑ Important Topics - Round TubingChapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Measuring a Tube❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report

Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Preparing the Learn Execute file❑ Start Programming❑ Constructing a Nominal Tube❑ Construct Tube Points❑ Measuring a Tube❑ Tube Alignment❑ Printing a Report❑ End Learn.

Chapter 27: Tool Building❑ Tool Building

❑ DRO Window❑ Dynamic DRO Window

❑ Important Topics - Tool Building

Page 15: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

vii

Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical❑ Practical Exercise

❑ Aligning to the CAD❑ Iterative Alignment❑ Import Model❑ Creating a DRO window on a Nominal❑ Positioning the Bracket❑ Recording the Tool Position

Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions❑ Geometric Characteristics and Symbols❑ Form Dimensions❑ Orientation Dimensions

❑ Parallelism❑ Perpendicularity❑ Concentricity

❑ True Position Dimensions❑ RFS (Regardless of Feature Size)❑ MMC (Maximum Material Condition)

❑ Important Topics - Advanced DimensionsChapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Constructing Nominals❑ Creating a Nominal Alignment❑ Measure the Datum Features❑ Constructing the Measured Alignment❑ Position Dimensions❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report❑ Save The Measurements

Chapter 31: Introduction to Scanning❑ What is Scanning?❑ Why Scan?❑ Scanning Options

❑ Freehand Scan❑ Lock Planes❑ Editing Scan data

❑ Important Topics - Introduction to ScanningChapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Measuring and Creating an Alignment❑ CAD=Part❑ Save the Measurements

Page 16: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

viii

❑ Scan Measurement Preference❑ Freehand Scanning (2D)❑ Parallel Lock Planes

Chapter 33: Measurement Automation❑ Learn Mode

❑ On-Line Learn❑ Off-Line Learn

❑ Execute Mode❑ Important Topics - Measurement Automation

Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Translating and Adding CAD❑ Start Learning❑ Measure Alignment/Datum Features❑ Creating an Alignment❑ Constructions and Dimensions❑ Generating a Report❑ End Learn.❑ Execute Mode

Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Translating and Adding CAD❑ Start Learning❑ Add Alignment/Datum Features❑ Adding an Alignment❑ Measuring Features❑ Adding Constructions and Dimensions❑ Generating a Report❑ End Learn❑ Execute Mode

Chapter 36: Measurement Automation❑ Learn Mode

❑ Online or Offline?❑ Execute Mode

❑ Display Results❑ Important Topics - Measurement Automation

Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical❑ Practical Exercise

Page 17: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

ix

❑ Selecting Units and Default Tolerances❑ Start Programming❑ Constructing the Measured Alignment❑ Printing a Report❑ Modifying and Saving Your Learn file❑ Execute Mode

Chapter 38: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator

❑ SoftCheck Tools❑ Taking Pictures❑ Image Creator❑ The Green Ball

❑ 3D Effects❑ Independent Comments

❑ Hot Keys for Image Creator❑ Important Topics - Creating Digital Pictures

Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Taking and Importing Images❑ Adding the Green/Red Balls❑ Creating Images, Icons and Reports❑ Saving the Image List❑ Preview the SoftCheck Tool in CAM2 Measure❑ Execute the SoftCheck Tool

Chapter 40: SoftCheck Tool Manager❑ Using the SoftCheck Tool Manager

❑ Navigating the SCTM❑ Main Screen❑ Tool List❑ Administrator

❑ Important Topics - SoftCheck Tool ManagerChapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE❑ Transferring SCTs to a New Computer❑ SoftCheck Tool Setup

Chapter 42: Advanced Graphical Reporting❑ Saving Data to CAM2 SPC Graph

❑ Using Pictures from a Digital Camera❑ Chart Types

Page 18: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

x

❑ Advanced Chart Options❑ Important Topics - Advanced Graphical Reporting

Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical❑ Practical Exercise

❑ Modify the Learn/Execute Program❑ Running the Learn Execute Program❑ Creating a SPC Graph Template❑ Align Icons❑ Adding a Preview to the Program

Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems❑ Feature Reducibility

❑ 3-2-1 TYPE Coordinate Systems❑ Coordinate Systems❑ Change Coordinate System Discussion

❑ Important Topics - Intermediate AlignmentsChapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

❑ PRACTICAL Exercise❑ Measuring the Alignment Features❑ Setting an Iterative Alignment❑ 3-2-1❑ Separate Origin❑ Perpendicular Intersect❑ Bore❑ Line-Line❑ Midpoint❑ 3 Point❑ 3 Plane❑ Set Active Coordinate System❑ Change Coordinate System

❑ Rotation❑ Translation

Chapter 46: Advanced Coordinate System❑ Calculated Coordinate System❑ CAD=Part❑ Constructions

❑ 2 Offset Line❑ 3 Offset Plane

❑ Important Topics - Advanced Coordinate SystemsChapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE❑ Nominal Alignments on the CAD

Page 19: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

xi

❑ Construct the Plane❑ Construct the Plane❑ Construct the Line❑ Complete the Coordinate System❑ Verify Alignment

Chapter 48: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments❑ Feature Alignment❑ Iterative Alignment with Surface Points❑ Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values

❑ When to Use This Technique❑ Watch Out!

❑ Important Topics - Advanced CAD to Part AlignmentsChapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

Practical❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Feature Alignment❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Surface Points

❑ Using Surfaces as Nominals❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values

❑ Measurement Template❑ Using Surface Points

Page 20: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

xii

Page 21: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

1Chapter 1: Hardware Overview

Chapter 1: Hardware Overview• Objective – The instructor will demonstrate all the

necessary cable connections and prepare the FaroArm for measuring. After completing this exercise, the student will know the proper mounting techniques to ensure accurate measurements.

FaroArm Control StationListed below are a few of the common components for the FaroArm Control Station systems:

❑ Surface Mount Plate❑ 1 - 6 mm Ball Probe❑ 1 - 3 mm Ball Probe ❑ FARO Calibration Cone❑ Wrench❑ USB Cable❑ Power Supply with electrical cable❑ FaroArm Accessories Manual❑ CAM2 Measure X manual❑ CAM2 Measure X Software CD❑ CAM2 Measure X Port Lock - Required to run CAM2 Measure X❑ Dust Cover - Use in dusty environments to protect the FaroArm

when not in use❑ FaroArm Certification Document

Setting up the FaroArmThe FARO Control Station contains an instruction sheet for the unpacking and setup of the tripod, computer, FaroArm, and printer.

It is very important that the FaroArm is mounted in a stable relationship to the part (the part should not move relative to the FaroArm). When in doubt, a dial indicator can be used to measure the deflection of the base of the FaroArm. Poor accuracy is generally caused by poor mounting.

Page 22: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2Chapter 1: Hardware Overview

1 Attach the 3.5 inch threaded ring and surface mount plate to any stable location. A granite slab, or acceptably rigid surface, is recommended. Tighten all mounting bolts to 11.5 N-m (100-inch pounds).

2 Place the FaroArm on top of the 3.5 inch threaded ring.

3 Screw the threaded collar clamp onto the base of the FaroArm and the 3.5 inch threaded ring.

FIGURE 1-1 Mounting the Plate

Page 23: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3Chapter 1: Hardware Overview

4 Use the wrench to tighten the threaded collar clamp.

Connecting the ComputerThe host computer runs the CAM2 Measure X software in the Microsoft Windows (2000, XP) environment.

The port lock plugs into the parallel (printer), or any USB port, and authorizes CAM2 Measure X to operate.

The FaroArm output is accepted through any PC-compatible computer

USB port.

The FaroArm is then connected to the Power Supply cable.

FIGURE 1-2 Mounting the FaroArm

• I = On.

• O = Off.

FIGURE 1-3 FaroArm cable connections

USBPORT

On/OffSWITCH

Page 24: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4Chapter 1: Hardware Overview

For safety reasons, the power cord should be connected last.

NOTE: Complete all cable connections before applying power to the computer and the FaroArm.

Referencing the Encoders

Each of the six (or seven) encoders in the FaroArm must be referenced

before the system can output data. The end stop warning window shows all six (or seven) encoders in error until each is referenced. In a systematic manner, rotate links one through six (or seven) until each warning clears.

NOTE: The FaroArm must be properly connected to the host computer running the measuring software to see the reference dialog box

1 FaroArm.

2 Computer.

3 USB Cable.

4 FaroArm Power Supply.

5 Power Outlet.

FIGURE 1-4 Connecting the Cables

FIGURE 1-5 Referencing the encoders

213

4 5

Page 25: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5Chapter 1: Hardware Overview

FaroArm Handle ButtonsThe FRONT button is used to collect data, and the BACK button to accept the data.

• The FRONT button is green and nearest the probe.

• The BACK button is red and furthest from the probe.

The FaroArm has two sets of buttons, where the FRONT buttons and BACK buttons are redundant and wired together internally. When a button is pressed, the LED light turns on (red or green) and the Computer sounds.

FaroArm ErrorsThe FaroArm error codes are listed in the back of the FaroArm Manual. If an error occurs, contact FARO Customer Support.

• Please have a written description of the error and what was done just before the error occurred.

• Know the FaroArm Serial Number before calling. The Serial Number is listed on the base of the FaroArm.

FIGURE 1-6 FaroArm Handle Buttons

LED

BACK BUTTON

FRONT BUTTON

Page 26: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6Chapter 1: Hardware Overview

Important Topics - Hardware Overview • The FaroArm should always feel fluid in its movement.

• If excessive force is needed to move to a measuring location, a degree of freedom has probably been lost.

• The following figures illustrate some of the possible positions of a FaroArm in which a degree of freedom has been lost.

• The 2 Sigma Single Point Accuracy Value is labeled on the FaroArm. In general, no measurement with the FaroArm should exceed the 3 Sigma Linear Displacement Accuracy Value.

• Poor accuracy is generally caused by poor mounting.

• Connect the power cable last.

• The port lock plugs into the computers USB or parallel port and enables CAM2 Measure X.

FIGURE 1-7 Loss of a Degree of Freedom

Page 27: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7Chapter 2: Hardware Overview Practical

Chapter 2: Hardware Overview Practical

Practical ExercisePractice the setup and packing of the FaroArm/CAM2 Measure X system, or the FARO Control Station System.

Instructors Comments

Page 28: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 29: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

9Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

• Objective - The instructor will introduce the CAM2 Measure X user interface. After completing this section the students will be able to customize the system and hardware settings.

Using this manualThe practical sections of this manual include step by step instructions that instruct you in every step of the process. For example, when we want you to select a command, you will see the following text.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT > SURFACE POINT.

You should use the mouse to select the command from the pull-down menu bar.

2 ❑ After selecting any command, you will see messages in the Output control bar at the bottom of the screen.

FIGURE 3-1 Selecting commands from the menu

Instructors Comments

Remember this assumes that the Measurement Device is connected. Try to make sure that each system is operating properly before class.

Page 30: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

10Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Starting CAM2 Measure XSelect CAM2 Measure X from the Windows START button.

Select the units: inches, or millimeters. This creates a new file on the screen.

NOTE: The units cannot be switched during the measurement session.

The default Part Preferences automatically load, these set the decimal places, tolerances, report formats, and other part related preferences. You can use CAM2 Measure X without a measuring device. This is often called using CAM2 Measure X off line.

Screen Layout

NOTE: This figure above shows the default setup, but you customize the screen layout by dragging the toolbars and control bars.

1 Graphics Field 2 Toolbar Buttons3 Digital Read Out (DRO) 4 Output Bar5 Pull Down menu 6 Status Bar7 Control Bars

FIGURE 3-2 Screen Layout

6

3

1

2

5

7

4

Page 31: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

11Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Graphics Field

The major portion of the CAM2 Measure X screen is consumed by the graphics field. This is the area that displays the measurements, and CAD data.

DRO Window

The Digital Readout (DRO) Window displays the current coordinate information from the measuring device. This window is located at the top of the CAM2 Measure X window. You can move and size the window with the mouse. Hide the window by pressing the D key on the computer keyboard. Press the D key again to display the DRO Window. These keyboard keys are

referred to as Hot Keys in CAM2 Measure X. There are many more hot keys listed in the back of this section.

Pull-down Menus

On the top of the screen there is a pull-down menu bar. All the CAM2 Measure X commands can be accessed from the menu bar using the mouse.

FIGURE 3-3 Graphics Field

FIGURE 3-4 Digital ReadOut

FIGURE 3-5 Pull-down menu bar

Page 32: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

12Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Toolbar Buttons

Along the top of the screen are the toolbars. Toolbars consist of buttons

with pictures that represent the different commands. If the mouse is hovered over a button for a few seconds a tool tip appears describing the function of the tool bar button. A longer description also appears at the bottom of the screen in the Status Bar.

Output Control Bar

On the bottom of the screen is the Output Control Bar. Instruction for the Current Command appears here, so take a look at it often. The Output Control Bar appears automatically when new text is added by the program, and will collapse after a few seconds.

Status Bar

On the very bottom of the screen is the Status Bar. The description of the highlighted command appears on this bar, as well as the current units and the XYZ location of the cursor in the CAD coordinate system.

FIGURE 3-6 Toolbar Buttons

FIGURE 3-7 Output Control Bar

FIGURE 3-8 Status Bar

Page 33: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

13Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Control Bars

Along the left side of the screen are the three Control Bars. The Navigator, Saved Views, and CAD Parts bars provide quick access to some of the more commonly used commands.

CAM2 Measure X HELPCAM2 Measure X uses a standard Windows HTML Help file. You can search through the help file by utilizing contents, index, or a keyword by using each tab on the left side of the Help window. The CAM2 Measure XUser Manual is also available on the User Manual CD-ROM. You can view, search, and print the electronic file (*.pdf) using Adobe Acrobat Reader software.

About CAM2

About CAM2 Measure X displays the version, build number and FARO Customer Service contact information.

FIGURE 3-9 Control Bars

FIGURE 3-10 About CAM2

Page 34: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

14Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Hotkeys - ViewingKeys Command

i Zooms In

o Zooms Out

e Reset the View, or Zoom All

l Arrange Labels

WUXV Pan

a Device View (point the probe and press the FRONT button to set the view)

^ Top View

% Side View

$ Front View

) Isometric View

C+t Center View

S+A+E Full Screen

S++ Increase Whisker Scale

- Decrease Whisker Scale

Page 35: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

15Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Hotkeys - Viewing (on numeric keypad)

NOTE: On most Laptop computers there is a L key which switches a section of the keyboard to function as the numeric keypad from a full size keyboard.

Shortcuts - Viewing (with the mouse)

Keys Command

+ Zooms In

- Zooms Out

8462 Pan

7 Rotate around X Counterclockwise

9 Rotate around X Clockwise

1 Rotate around Y Counterclockwise

3 Rotate around Y Clockwise

0 Rotate around Z Counterclockwise

. Rotate around Z Clockwise

Keys Command

S and drag the Right Mouse buttonDynamic Zoom

Mouse Wheel Button Dynamic Zoom

C and drag the Right Mouse buttonDynamic Pan

CS and drag the Right Mouse buttonDynamic Rotate

Page 36: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

16Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Hotkeys - CommandsKeys Command

É Help

G Cancel

Ê Measure a Comp Off Point

! Measure a Comp Axis Point

Ë Measure a Plane

Ì Measure a 2D Line

Ò Measure a Circle

Ó Measure a Cylinder

Ô Measure a Sphere

d Turns off the DRO (digital read out)

p Change Probe

t Reset Interferometer (FARO Laser Tracker Only)

n Set Distance Mode (FARO Laser Tracker Only)

s Search (FARO Laser Tracker Only)

x Switch between Single Point and Scan Mode

m Material Thickness (Sheet Metal commands only)

I Collect Reading

H Compensation Point

B Remove Reading

Page 37: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

17Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Important Topics - Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

• Use the toolbar buttons, or the pull-down menu bar to access commands.

• CAM2 Measure X runs both with or without a FaroArm.

• CAM2 Measure X translates IGES, VDA, CATIA v4 and v5, Unigraphics, Parasolid, SolidWorks, Solid Edge and OpenNURBS file formats. For other CAD formats, use Rhino software to import your file and save as an OpenNURBS file.

• Never turn off the computer while CAM2 Measure X is running.

Page 38: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 39: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

19Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification

Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate the procedure for calibrating probes. After completing this section, the student will be able to perform a proper probe calibration technique.

Calibration and CertificationWhat is Calibration?

Probe calibration is a localized process by which a measurement device is optimized to perform measurements accurately.

To understand probe calibration, you must first understand the FaroArm's reference system. The FaroArm is factory calibrated from the base to the last joint or axis, and the position of this joint is defined by the coordinate system which originates at the base of the FaroArm. The last axis of the FaroArm has its own coordinate system, and the location of the center of the ball probe is reported in the probe's coordinate system. After the probe's coordinates are established, these are translated into FaroArm coordinates and you are ready to start taking measurements.

Measurement accuracy relies on probe calibration under optimal conditions.To optimize calibration and minimize stress-induced errors during this critical procedure, place the FaroArm in a single position in which the elbow joint remains relatively stationary without any obstructions or restrictions in movement while the calibration is performed; do not flop the elbow joint during calibration. Only the last joint of the FaroArm must be exercised for the software to accurately calibrate the probe tip. Minimizing elbow joint movement and focusing on the probe and last arm joint during calibration maximizes measurement accuracy.

Page 40: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

20Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification

Probe Calibration

The FaroArm collects data by touching your part with a probe attached to the end of the handle. Once the probe is attached, the X,Y,Z location of the probe tip, relative to the FaroArm's coordinate system, must be determined prior to measuring. Since the circumference of the probe tip always touches the part, the probe's center must be determined. This is why probe calibration is necessary.

Calibrate the probe prior to every measurement session; or, if you are using several probes, calibrate each probe any time you switch. While it is true that a straight probe can be removed and replaced very accurately, it is still good practice to perform the probe calibration.

There are two acceptable ways to calibrate a probe:

• Single Hole Method. Recommended for standard ball probes.

• Sphere Method. Recommended for touch trigger probes and point probes.

In this course, we will present the Single Hole method.

Certification

Certification is the process by which a measurement device is tested to determine its accuracy. In this course, we will practice the FARO Single Point method for single point repeatability certification. This test can be quickly performed before any measurement survey to ensure that the device is performing within specification.

Probe CalibrationThe probe calibration is the most critical task performed during any measurement session. If the probe calibration is good, the measurements will be accurate. If the probe calibration is bad, the measurements will not be accurate.

XYZ Location

The last axis of the FaroArm has its own coordinate system. The location of the center of the ball probe will be reported in this coordinate system. Using the same probe, the FaroArm should be able to repeat this value with better results than the single-point accuracy of the device.

Page 41: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

21Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification

Probe Calibration Error

A PASS condition indicates a result with a low calibration error (2 Sigma value equals or below device specification). A FAIL condition indicates a result with a high calibration error (2 Sigma value above device specification).

Single Hole Method

The Single Hole calibration is performed using the FARO probe calibration cone or a 5mm machine drilled hole. The hole does not have to be exactly 5mm, but it must be smaller than the probe’s diameter with a smooth seat.

All of the points in this method will be collected by holding down the FRONT button. The FaroArm will collect points as fast as possible (scanning) until the FRONT button is released.

Auxiliary Switch

To use a Renishaw touch probe, activate the Auxiliary switch by selecting the EDIT button. Be sure to deactivate it when using a hard probe. Calibrate this probe using the Sphere Calibration method. For more information about the Sphere Calibration method, click the HELP button in the SPHERE CALIBRATION dialog box or your FaroArm manual. You may also find additional information at www.faro.com, or by contacting FARO Customer Service.

FIGURE 4-1 Probe Calibration

Position #1

Position #2

Position #3

Page 42: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

22Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification

Important Topics - Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification

• The probe diameter must be specified prior to performing a probe calibration.

• Probe calibration should be performed anytime the probe is changed or the probe is damaged.

• The Single Point Certification test is a quick way to see if the FaroArm is calibrated correctly.

• Proper technique is the most important factor in achieving a good probe calibration.

Page 43: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

23Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical

Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical

Practical ExerciseThis exercise will calibrate the probe and perform a single-point certification.

Probe Calibration

The Single Hole calibration is performed using the FARO Calibration Cone, or machined hole smaller than the diameter of the ball probe. The machined hole must have a smooth seat, and the ball probe must fix securely in the hole.

Calibrate Probe

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the CURRENT PROBE pull down, select 6mm Ball Probe.

3 ❑ Click the Single Hole Method button.

4 ❑ Place the ball probe in the cone in the horizontal position #1.

FIGURE 5-1 Probe Calibration

Instructors Comments

Enter Comments Here

Page 44: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

24Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical

5 ❑ Press and hold the FRONT button.

CAUTION: The probe must be well-seated in the hole when digitizing all calibration points. Even one or two poorly digitized points significantly affects the optimization process, which then has an effect on the accuracy of the FaroArm.

6 ❑ Place the ball probe in the cone in the horizontal position #2.

7 ❑ Press and hold the FRONT button.

8 ❑ Place the ball probe in the cone in the horizontal position #3.

9 ❑ Press and hold the FRONT button.

• Sweep the handle up to vertical position. Be sure that the ball probe remains seated in the hole

• Release the FRONT button.

FIGURE 5-2 Single Hole Method Sweep 1

• Sweep the handle up to vertical position. Be sure that the ball probe remains seated in the hole

• Release the FRONT button.

FIGURE 5-3 Single Hole Method Sweep 2

• Sweep the handle up to vertical position. Be sure that the ball probe remains seated in the hole

• Release the FRONT button.

FIGURE 5-4 Single Hole Method Sweep 3

Page 45: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

25Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical

10 ❑ Press the BACK button

11 ❑ Check the Calibration.

12 ❑ Repeat the probe calibration two more times.

Results

1 ❑ Click the VIEW LOG button.

2 ❑ Compete the following table.

NOTE: Results should be half the two sigma single point accuracy of the measurement device. Two sigma single point accuracy is specified on the device label.

• If Calibration Status = Passed, click OK.

• If Calibration Status = Failed, click the RETRY button and repeat step 4 though 10.

FIGURE 5-5 Pass or Fail?

FIGURE 5-6 View Log

Results:

DX1=______(X1-X2), DY1=______(Y1-Y2), DZ1=______(Z1-Z2)

DX2=______(X2-X3), DY2=______(Y2-Y3), DZ2=______(Z2-Z3)

DX3=______(X3-X1), DY3=______(Y3-Y1), DZ3=______(Z3-Z1)

Page 46: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

26Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical

Single Point Certification

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CERTIFICATION < SINGLE POINT.

2 ❑ Place the probe in any of the small holes (P1 - P4) of the FARO standard demonstration part - base, or in the FARO calibration cone.

3 ❑ Press the FRONT button to start taking points. Take 50 points. Distribute the points evenly, while fully articulating the FaroArm.

4 ❑ Press the BACK button when done.

5 ❑ Enter information into the ENTER HEADER IMFORMATION dialog box for the certification report:

6 ❑ The measured 2 sigma value of X,Y and Z should be less than the specified 2 sigma value for X,Y and Z. Also, the 2 sigma length should be less than the 2 sigma linear displacement accuracy of the device. If not, repeat the test.

FIGURE 5-7 Certified two sigma single point accuracy

• Operator Name = Your Name.

• Name of Part = Single Point Test.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 5-8 Enter Header Information

S/N:S/N: P08020100763

Model:Model: P08 Rev:Rev: 4.4 Certified 2 SigmaCertified 2 SigmaSingle Point Accuracy:Single Point Accuracy:

Certification Certification Date:Date: Nov 18, 2001

+/- .025 mm.

MADE IN U.S.A.

Page 47: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

27Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical

7 ❑ Save the certification report to a file.

• Click the SAVE button.

• Click OK to FILE SAVED.

8 ❑ Click OK.

NOTE: The certification file is saved as the serial number.txt in the SPC Graph directories: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Faro\SPC Graph\Part Name\Serial Number.txt.

Page 48: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 49: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

29Chapter 6: Feature Measurement

Chapter 6: Feature Measurement• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate proper

measurement and compensation techniques. After completion of this section the student will learn to measure geometric features properly. They will also be able to differentiate the differences between measured, constructed and nominal features.

Types of Features

There are two basic types of features in CAM2 Measure X. 2D Features

require a plane of projection, and 3D Features do not.

Instructors Comments

Enter Comments Here

Page 50: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

30Chapter 6: Feature Measurement

2D Features

A 2D feature requires a plane of projection. When selecting a 2D feature from

the measurement menu, the Select Plane dialog box will appear. You will always need to select the plane to which the points will be projected. A good way to tell if a feature is 2D is the appearance of the dialog box.

FIGURE 6-1 Select Plane

1. Rectangular Slot 2. Circles

3. Round Slot 4. Ellipse

5. 2D LineFIGURE 6-2 2D Features

5

12

3

4

Page 51: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

31Chapter 6: Feature Measurement

3D Features

A 3D feature does not require a plane of projection. 3D features also have

some depth and are displayed as surfaces within CAM2 Measure X.

1. Cone 2. Sphere

3. CylindersFIGURE 6-3 3D Features

1

2

3

Page 52: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

32Chapter 6: Feature Measurement

CompensationAfter the FaroArm’s probe has been calibrated you are ready to start measuring. When measuring with a ball probe, a point is taken in the center of the probe each time the FRONT button is pressed. The point actually needs to be projected the radius of the probe in order for the measurement to be taken in the correct location. The distance between the point of contact and the center of the probe is known as Probe Offset. This transfer of the point from the center of the probe to the correct location is known as probe compensation.

NOTE: The location of the probe is extremely important when the BACK button of the FaroArm is pressed.

1. Probe Tip 2. Center of the probe

3. Probe OffsetFIGURE 6-4 Probe Offset

3

2

1

Page 53: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

33Chapter 6: Feature Measurement

To better explain this subject here are a few examples.

Plane Compensation

A plane is defined using the center of the probe for each point taken with the FRONT button as shown below.

FIGURE 6-5 Plane Measurement

FIGURE 6-6 Pre-Plane

Page 54: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

34Chapter 6: Feature Measurement

This plane can then be compensated in one of two directions. The correct compensation depends on where the BACK button is pressed. In this situation the BACK button is to be pressed above the plane. The plane will then be compensated down the distance equal to the probe radius.

FIGURE 6-7 Probe Compensation

Page 55: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

35Chapter 6: Feature Measurement

Compensation of a 2D Feature

When measuring a 2D feature the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears. Each point of the 2D feature is automatically projected to that selected plane. Compensation for the probe diameter will be performed when measuring 2D features. When measuring a hole, the hole will be measured as a circle projected to a selected plane. The compensation point is taken by pressing the BACK button inside the hole for an inner diameter, outside the post for an outer diameter. This inner diameter concept is demonstrated below.

Measure at least three points inside the hole.

Each time the FRONT button is pressed that point is automatically projected to the selected plane.

FIGURE 6-8 Circle Measurement

FIGURE 6-9 Plane Projection

Page 56: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

36Chapter 6: Feature Measurement

A circle is defined.

By compensating in the center of the hole the circle is offset the distance equal to the radius of the probe. This results in the correct diameter.

FIGURE 6-10 Pre-Compensated Circle

FIGURE 6-11 Circle Compensation

Page 57: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

37Chapter 6: Feature Measurement

Review FeaturesReview Features allows the operator to see every feature that has been measured or constructed in a particular measurement session. All data is displayed in the current alignment.

Printing

From Review Features a graphical text report can be printed to a printer, saved to a file, or e-mailed.

Erasing

Delete extra or un-needed features with the DELETE icon, or with the

ERASE button in the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box.

Important Topics - Feature Measurement• A 2D feature requires a plane of projection.

• A 3D feature does not require a plane of projection.

• The FRONT button is used to take measured points. The BACK button is used to compensate for the radius of the probe.

Page 58: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 59: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

39Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical

Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical

Practical ExercisesExecute Mode

EXECUTE mode allows the operator to run pre-programmed measurement routines. To help get accustomed to the FaroArm, measure several of the pre-programmed measurements.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

4 ❑ From the LIST window, select 10REF088_XLN Basic Measurements.

5 ❑ Click the EXECUTE button.

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 7-1 Choose File type

FIGURE 7-2 Select the Basic Measurements Program

Page 60: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

40Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical

6 ❑ Wait a few seconds while the CAD file loads.

7 ❑ Read each COMMENT box.

8 ❑ Click the OK button to clear the comments box.

9 ❑ Follow the glowing targets to measure the points using the FRONT button on the FaroArm.

10 ❑ Once all the points for a feature are measured, a trickle down tone will be played by the computer. Press the BACK button on the FaroArm.

REMEMBER: The location of where the BACK button is pressed determines the direction of the probe compensation.

11 ❑ Measure all the features in the program in the same manner.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels

The measurement routine is automatically performing alignments, constructions, and dimensions. These commands will be discussed in detail in the following chapters.

12 ❑ After the last measurement, the program will prompt the operator to measure another part, press the FRONT button for YES.

FIGURE 7-3 Comment box

FIGURE 7-4 Repeat the Program?

Page 61: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

41Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical

View Control

Run the program again.

Try the following view commands:

Hot Keys - Viewing

Keys Command

i Zooms In

o Zooms Out

e Reset the View, or Zoom All

WUXV Pan

a Device View (point the probe and press the FRONT button to set the view)

^ Top View

% Side View

$ Front View

) Isometric View

C+t Center View

S+A+E Full Screen

S++ Increase Whisker Scale

- Decrease Whisker Scale

Page 62: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

42Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical

Hot Keys - Viewing (on numeric keypad)

NOTE: On most Laptop computers there is a L key which switches a section of the keyboard to function as the numeric keypad from a full size keyboard.

At the end of the program, when prompted to measure another part, press the BACK button for NO. The graphics screen now contains all of the features that have just been measured and all of the nominal features from the program.

Keys Command

+ Zooms In

- Zooms Out

8462 Pan

7 Rotate around X Counterclockwise

9 Rotate around X Clockwise

1 Rotate around Y Counterclockwise

3 Rotate around Y Clockwise

0 Rotate around Z Counterclockwise

. Rotate around Z Clockwise

Page 63: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

43Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical

Review Features

To view the measurement data, use the Review Features command.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Take a look at the features by selecting them in the FEATURE LIST.

NOTE: Measurements have the M_ prefix. Constructions have the C_ prefix. Nominals have the N_ prefix.

FIGURE 7-5 Review Features

Page 64: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 65: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

45Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will introduce coordinate systems and alignments. After completion of this section, the student will understand the concepts of plane (3), line (2), and point (1) reducibility. The student will gain an understanding of how and why coordinate systems are used.

Coordinate SystemsWhat is a Coordinate System?

Coordinate systems are XYZ reference frames built from measured features. Start by measuring the features that will be used to construct a coordinate system. These are sometimes called datum features.

CAM2 Measure X offers many ways to establish coordinate systems, in this section two of the most common coordinate systems: the 3-2-1 and the Line-Line will be presented. CAM2 Measure X allows the operator to set up several different coordinate systems and switch between them. New coordinate systems can be created from existing coordinate systems.

Page 66: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

46Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

Two coordinate systems that are used in this class:

1 The XYZ coordinate system of the measurement device and of the nominal features are known as the World Coordinate System or WCS (1).

2 The XYZ coordinates that are constructed from a coordinate system on the part are known as the Users Coordinate System or UCS (2).

AlignmentsWhat is an Alignment?

The term alignment comes from the traditional CMM (Coordinate

Measuring Machine) to indicate that the part needs to be aligned to the coordinate system of the machine.

In CAM2 Measure X, the coordinate system of the measured features is aligned with the coordinate system of nominal features. This allows you to compare the measured part to the design data. The process is also known as CAD to Part alignment.

An alignment should be established as soon as possible.

1 Device, Software or Nominal Coordinate System

2 Part or Constructed Coordinate System

FIGURE 8-1 Coordinate System

2

1

Page 67: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

47Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

Feature ReducibilityFeature Reducibility is a term used to describe that one type of feature can be used like another type for alignments, constructions and dimensions.

For example, a circle is point reducible, that means it can be used like a point for alignments, constructions, or dimensions.

A Circle is also Line reducible and Plane reducible.

FIGURE 8-2 Point Reducability

FIGURE 8-3 Line and Plane Reducability

Page 68: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

48Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

Feature Reducibility Exercise

Complete the following feature reducibility table:

Plane Line Point

Arc X X X

Circle X X X

Cylinder X

Cone X X X

Ellipse X X X

Line X

Plane X

Point X

Page 69: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

49Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

Rectan-gular Slot

X X X

Round Slot

X X X

Sphere X

Plane Line Point

Page 70: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

50Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

ConstructionsWhat is a Construction?

A construction allows you to create features that cannot be measured directly. Sometimes points or other features are specified on a drawing but do not actually exist on the part. For example, the intersection of two lines where the corner has a fillet or radius.

Common Constructions

The following is a list of some of the more common constructions used in basic measurement:

1 Point:• Line/Line: Intersection of two lines.

• Line/Feature: Intersection of line and another feature. (Such as plane or sphere)

FIGURE 8-4 Intersection Point

Page 71: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

51Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

2 Circle:• Best-fit: Bolt circle diameters.

3 Plane:• Parallel: Constructs a plane at a known distance from another plane.

• Bisector: Constructs a plane between two planes.

There are many constructions available. Review the constructions to evaluate which commands can be applied to a measurement task.

FIGURE 8-5 Bolt Hole Circle

Page 72: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

52Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

DimensionsWhat is a Dimension?

A dimension describes the relationship between two or more features. There are several types of dimensions available in CAM2 Measure X:

1 Length: Displays the 3D distance between two features as well as the change in X, Y and Z.

FIGURE 8-6 Point to Point distance

FIGURE 8-7 Point to Line distance

Page 73: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

53Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

FIGURE 8-8 Point to Plane distance

Page 74: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

54Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

2 Angle: Displays the angle between two (or three) features.

3 Orientation: These are geometric dimensioning and tolerancing (GD&T) features that display a length result. CAM2 Measure X has a separate pull-down menu for a variety of GD&T dimensions.

FIGURE 8-9 Angle Line to Line

Page 75: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

55Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

Tricky Dimensions

Most CAM2 Measure X dimensions are fairly straight forward, but there are few that are confusing:

Dimension > Length > Line to Line, or Dimension > Length > Plane to Plane:

This gives the minimum distance between two features. The length is measured from the center point of one feature to the perpendicular distance of the other feature. Selecting the features in the opposite order will generate a different result.

A measured or constructed point on one of the features and the Dimension > Length > Point to Line, or Dimension > Length > Point to Plane command provides the best solution.

FIGURE 8-10 Dimension Line/Line or Plane/Plane

Page 76: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

56Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements

Important Topics - Basic Part Measurement• All coordinate systems behave in the same manner. Each coordinate

system requires a plane, a line, and a point.

• Feature reducibility is a term used to describe a feature for coordinate systems, constructions, and dimensions.

• A best fit circle is constructed using at least three point reducible features.

Page 77: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

57Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Practical ExerciseUsing the base plate of the demo part, complete a typical measurement session. In the first exercise, the EXECUTE command was used. This exercise will allow you to be more independent and select the commands from the pull-down menu bar

Set the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of the plate will be the base plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-axis and origin respectively.

Setting the Alignment

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

As default, CAM2 Measure X automatically loads millimeters as the units, ± 1.27 as the tolerances, and a DRO display of 4 numbers after the decimal. It is very likely that your part will not use these values. However, CAM2 Measure X has the ability to modify, save and load part preferences.

FIGURE 9-1 FARO Demonstration Part

E

12

3

45

6

7

89

10F

A

C D

B

G

P1 P2

P3 P4

Page 78: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

58Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

NOTE: Loading the Metric-0.25mm file will change all the tolerances to±0.25mm. This will be the default value for every new feature added to CAM2 Measure.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 9-3 Load Tolerances

If a student asks why are we loading these tolerances files, point them to the TOLERANCE tab and tell them that this part uses 0.25mm tolerances.

Loading the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file modifies all the tolerance values for all 28 feature types.

Page 79: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

59Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

7 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

NOTE: The number of digits for the label (001) is determined by the Application Preference, Miscellaneous, Number of Digits for Label. The default value is three.

NOTE: The decimal place values are determined by the Part Preference, Display Decimal Places. The default value is four places to the left, three to the right.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 9-4 Measure XY Plane

• The CENTER XYZ values describe the location of the center of the plane.

• The NORMAL IJK values describe the direction of the plane.

• RMS is the Root Mean Square value of the fit.

• STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit.

• MAX and MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit.

• FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure the plane.

FIGURE 9-5 Plane Results

Page 80: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

60Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

9 ❑ After accepting a plane, press the BACK button or the ESC key to cancel the plane measurement command.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure always continues to measure additional features until receiving a command to stop. Stop, or Cancel, the command by pressing the BACK button or by pressing the ESC key.

10 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

11 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each circle measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-6 Select Plane

Page 81: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

61Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

12 ❑ Measure the line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G. Start from the edge by Sphere A, working towards Sphere B.

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 9-7 Measure X Axis

• The POINT XYZ values describe the first point on the line.

• The AXIS IJK values describe the direction of the line.

• RMS is the Root Mean Square value of the fit.

• STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit.

• MAX and MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit.

• FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 9-8 Line Results

Page 82: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

62Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

14 ❑ Continue with the Measure 2D Line command.

NOTE: The Part Preference for Auto Plane Selection is set to LAST (default). This will place all 2D features on the last plane selected in the SELECT PLANE dialog.

15 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Measure the line nearest Slot F. Measure in the direction from Sphere A towards Sphere C.

FIGURE 9-9 Measure Y Intercept

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 9-10 Line Results

Page 83: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

63Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

16 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

NOTE: The Z Rotation IJK is the vector of the previous Z Axis relative to the new Z Axis. The Translation XYZ values shows where the coordinate system has moved. The Z Angle Rotation is the angle between the previous Z Axis and the new Z Axis. RMS is the Root Mean Square value of the fit. STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit. MAX AND MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit. FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system results.

18 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD = PART (This step will be discussed in the next chapter).

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001

• Select a Line = M_LINE002.

• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-11 Line/Line Intersect Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

S

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-12 CAD=Part Alignment

Page 84: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

64Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

19 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment results.

Feature Measurements

Measure the holes in the circular pattern starting with the hole that is labeled 1. See “FARO Demonstration Part” on page 57.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

FIGURE 9-13 Base Plate Alignment

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-14 Select Plane

Page 85: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

65Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

3 ❑ Measure the holes in the circular pattern starting with the hole that is labeled 1.

NOTE: In the RESULTS dialog box, the View Style changes from Simple to Tabular. After any alignment command, the View Style automatically changes to the Tabular style.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 9-15 Measure Circle 1

• The CENTER XYZ values describe the location of the center of the circle.

• The DIAMETER value describes the Diameter of the circle.

• FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure the circle.

FIGURE 9-16 Circle Results

Page 86: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

66Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

5 ❑ CAM2 Measure X always continues to measure circles until the command is canceled.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each circle measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels.

• Continue measuring all eight circles in the pattern (2-8).

FIGURE 9-17 Measure Circles 2 through 8

FIGURE 9-18 Measured Circles 1 through 8

Page 87: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

67Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Constructions

Determine the diameter of the bolt circle pattern of the eight holes.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < BEST FIT.

2 ❑ Take a look a the results.

NOTE: Was the circle accepted before changing the label? You can change the feature label later using the REVIEW FEATURES command.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001 through M_CIRCLE008.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-19 Construct Circle Best Fit

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE. This is the new name for this feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-20 Changing a Feature Label

Page 88: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

68Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Changing Labels from Review Features

NOTE: If the feature label was not changed in the RESULTS dialog, use the following steps to correct the feature label.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Double left mouse click on the bolt circle from the list of features.

• Select a Feature = C_CIRCLE001.

NOTE: The first object created in the file will be at the bottom of the list, the most recent feature at the top of the list.

3 ❑ Change the label. Type BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Select a Feature = BOLT_CIRCLE.

4 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

FIGURE 9-21 Review Features

Page 89: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

69Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Dimensions

To establish some dimensions measure a couple more features.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere A.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 9-22 Measure Sphere A

• The CENTER XYZ values describe the location of the center of the circle.

• The DIAMETER value describes the Diameter of the circle.

• FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then remeasure the sphere.

FIGURE 9-23 Sphere Results

Page 90: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

70Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

4 ❑ CAM2 Measure X always continues to measure spheres until the command is canceled. Continue measuring Sphere D.

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select LENGTH < POINT/POINT.

NOTE: Choose features from the drop-down list box, or use the FROM SCREEN button to pick it from the screen. In CAM2 Measure X dialog

boxes, all feature drop-down list boxes have a FROM SCREEN button so you can choose the feature from the CAD screen instead of the list box.

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 9-24 Measure Sphere D

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then remeasure the sphere.

FIGURE 9-25 Sphere Results

• Select 1st Point = M_SPHERE001.

• Select 2nd Point = M_SPHERE002.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-26 Dimension Length Point/Point

Page 91: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

71Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

8 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE < APEX.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• The DELTA XYZ values describe the distance between the two center points along each axis.

• The LENGTH value describes the straight distance between the two center points.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 9-27 Dimension Results

• Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003_I.

• Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001_I.

• Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-28 Dimension Angle Apex

• The ANGLE value is the angle between the three points.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 9-29 Angle Results

Page 92: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

72Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Printing and Saving a Text Report

View the results of the features using the REVIEW FEATURES command.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

FIGURE 9-30 Review Features

• Operator’s name = your name.

• Name of the part = Basic Measurements.

• Serial number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-31 Enter Header Information

Page 93: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

73Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Header = Header.

• Format = Simple.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-32 Report List

FIGURE 9-33 Report Preview

• File name = Basic Measurement.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 9-34 Save As

Page 94: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

74Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save The Measurements

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X saves files in the CAM2 Measure Document (*.fce) format.

Additional Coordinate Systems

If for some reason the alignment is not correct, or a different coordinate system is required, CAM2 Measure X is able to set up additional coordinate systems. For this exercise use the top surface of the plate, two spheres to define a line, and the center point of the bolt circle.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere B.

• File name = Basic Measurement.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 9-35 Save As

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 9-36 Measure Sphere B

Page 95: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

75Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

NOTE: Notice that the base plane can define something other than +XY, and the line can define something other than +X in the 3-2-1 coordinate system.

NOTE: This creates a new coordinate system to view the data. The X axis is perpendicular to M_PLANE001. The Y axis is parallel to a line between M_SPHERE001 and M_SPHERE003. The origin is located at the center of the bolt circle, C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then remeasure the sphere.

FIGURE 9-37 Sphere Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Direction of Plane = +YZ.

• Select the radio button next to FIRST POINT ON AXIS.

• First Point on Axis = M_SPHERE001.

• Second Point on Axis = M_SPHERE003.

• Direction of Axis = +Y.

• Select Origin = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-38 3-2-1 Coordinate System

Page 96: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

76Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Switching between coordinate systems.

The blue coordinate system icon shows the active coordinate system. The green coordinate system icon shows the non-active coordinate systems. There are two ways to change the active coordinate system.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < SET ACTIVE.

NOTE: The active coordinate system is now on the corner of the plate.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

NOTE: The active coordinate system is now on the center of the bolt circle.

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

• Set Active = C_COORDSYS001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-39 Set Active Coordinate System

• Current Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS002.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-40 Set Active Coordinate System from Review Features

Page 97: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

77Chapter 10: Checking a Part

Chapter 10: Checking a Part• Objective: The instructor will introduce nominals and how

to compare measured objects to them. The students will be able to measure a feature and have CAM2 Measure X determine if the dimension is out of tolerance.

NominalsWhat is a Nominal?

A nominal is the true value of a feature. The measured value of a part should be equal to or as close to the nominal value as possible. Compare

measurements to nominals to see if a part is good or bad (or to update the print to match the part).

Types of Nominals

The engineering or design department will provide a 3D CAD (Computer Aided Design) file or a print that contains the nominal information for the part. CAM2 Measure X has several methods to enter nominals into the file for comparison to the measurements.

1 Enter Values: Circles, Cones, Cylinders, Ellipses, Lines, Planes, Points, Slots, and Spheres are created by typing the known value. This is typically used when working with a paper drawing or hard copy, rather than an electronic copy of the CAD file.

2 From CAD: Translate, and add CAD models through IGES, VDA, CATIA® v4 and v5, Unigraphics®, Parasolid®, SolidWorks®, Solid Edge® and OpenNURBS formats. Then select the feature from the screen to add it to the CAM2 Measure X database as a nominal.

3 Construct Nominal: Sometimes, when working with CAD data, holes and other features are not displayed as separate entities, but rather they only exist as edges of surfaces or solids. CAM2 Measure X can construct a nominals by selecting points along the trimmed edge of a surface.

Instructors Comments

Enter Comments Here

Page 98: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

78Chapter 10: Checking a Part

CAD to Part Alignments

Nominals are considered CAD and measurements are considered the Part. To compare measured data to nominals, a CAD to Part type alignment must be completed. This course will focus on the two commands; CAD=PART and ITERATIVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not compare the XYZ information of a measured feature to a nominal feature without an alignment.

CAD=Part

This command requires that some type of constructed coordinate system on the part using measured features. Selecting CAD=PART sets the current coordinate system equal to the CAD (or Nominal) coordinate system. This will overlay the measurements onto the CAD (or Nominal) data.

To use CAD=PART, the coordinate system on the part must match the coordinate system on the CAD (or Nominal) data. In many cases the origin of the coordinate system will not be on the part. A rotation or a translation must be performed to get the coordinate system on the part to match the CAD (or Nominal) data.

The SCALE option allows the operator to adjust the measurement scale of the part, and adjust for temperature changes in the environment.

NOTE: Only use this functionality with very large parts, and are measuring over a extended period of time.

Important Topics - Checking a Part• CAD (or Nominal) data are the design values for the part.

• Create Nominal data in three different ways: From CAD, Enter Values, and Construct Nominals.

• A “CAD to Part” alignment must be successfully completed in order to compare measurements to nominals.

Page 99: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

79Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

Practical ExerciseUse a drawing for nominal information. Measure alignment features, construct a coordinate system, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Getting the Nominals

In this exercise check the demo part base using the reference drawing.

Datum features are specified in the print. The top surface is Datum A, the left edge is Datum B and the center circle is Datum C. Since the print does not show an X, Y, Z coordinate system, Datum A will be the XY plane, Datum B

FIGURE 11-1 FARO Demonstration Part

B

B

3 12

A

B

1

C

D

03FRM049-REV 1

B

5 4

5 4 3 2

A

C

D

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWINGIS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TITLE

Armed with Quality

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

FINSH REQUIRED63

15[.591]

[1.181]30

15[.591]

15[.591]

8X 20 [0.798]EQ. SP. ON A

140 [5.512] BC

25[.984]

+0.25-0.10

Ø 1.0 M A B C

A.50

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

25[.984]

100[3.94]

15[.591]

65[2.559]

170[6.693]

4X 5[.197]

50[1.969]

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

C60[2.362]

.50 A

.50

15°

160[6.299]

15[.591]

25[.984]

255[10.04]

20[.787]

40[1.575]

150[5.906]C

265[10.433]

300[11.811]

240[9.449]

65[2.559]

130[5.118]

167[6.575]

15[.591]

15[.591]

50[1.969]

20[.787] 20

[.787]

50[1.969]

65[2.56]

B.50 .50 B

20[.787]

SECTION B-B

Page 100: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

80Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

will be the X axis and Datum C will be the origin of the coordinate system (This may vary depending on the part).

Setting the Alignment

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 11-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 11-3 Load Tolerances

Page 101: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

81Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

7 ❑ Measure Datum A as a plane.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

9 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

10 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 11-4 Measure XY Plane

• Label = DATUM_A.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-5 Plane Results

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 11-6 Select Plane

Page 102: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

82Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

11 ❑ Measure Datum B as a line.

12 ❑ Take a look at the results.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels

13 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

14 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 11-7 Measure X Axis

• Label = DATUM_B.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-8 Line Results

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 11-9 Select Plane

Page 103: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

83Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

15 ❑ Measure Datum C as a circle.

16 ❑ Take a look at the results.

17 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button for compensation.

FIGURE 11-10 Measure Circle 9

• Label = DATUM_C.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-11 Circle Results

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = M_DATUM_C.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 11-12 3-2-1 Coordinate System

Page 104: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

84Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

19 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

20 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

This saves the position of the part as an alignment.

Begin checking the features on the part. Remember to perform the CAD to Part type alignment to see the measured compared to the nominal values.

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 11-13 CAD=Part Alignment

FIGURE 11-14 Datum Alignment

Page 105: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

85Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

Save The Measurements

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

Measuring Features and Adding Nominals

After identifying X, Y, Z on the print, the XYZ and diameter values can be extracted from the print:

Measure circles 1, 3, 5, and 7 in the bolt circle, starting with Circle 1 as indicated on the reference drawing of the demo part base.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• File name = Checking a Part.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 11-15 Save As

X Y Z Diameter

Circle 1 0.00 mm 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 3 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 5 0.00 mm -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 7 -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 11-16 Select Plane

Page 106: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

86Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

3 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

5 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button for compensation.

• Label = CIRCLE001_I.

FIGURE 11-17 Measure Circle 1

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 11-18 Results Nominal Tab

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-19 Construct Circle Enter Values

Page 107: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

87Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

6 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

7 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will save the tolerance information for the next circle

8 ❑ Click on the REPORT tab and see the deviations between the measured and the nominal.

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

• X= checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Y = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Z = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 11-20 Results Tolerance Tab

FIGURE 11-21 Tabular Results

Page 108: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

88Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

10 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

11 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

12 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button for compensation.

• Label = CIRCLE003_I.

FIGURE 11-22 Measure Circle 3

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 11-23 Results Nominal Tab

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-24 Construct Circle Enter Values

Page 109: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

89Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

14 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

15 ❑ Click OK to accept the results. The nominal will be created in Review Features.

16 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the RESULTS. The nominal will be created in Review Features.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button for compensation.

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.

FIGURE 11-25 Measure Circle 5

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button for compensation.

• Label = CIRCLE007_I.

FIGURE 11-26 Measure Circle 7

Page 110: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

90Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

Adding a Nominal through Review Features

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Select M_CIRCLE005_I from the SELECT A FEATURE list.

3 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

4 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

5 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

6 ❑ Select M_CIRCEL007_I from the SELECT A FEATURE list.

7 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

8 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-27 Construct Circle Enter Values

• X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-28 Construct Circle Enter Values

Page 111: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

91Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

2 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

3 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

4 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

• Operator’s Name = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Checking a Part.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 11-29 Enter Header Information

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 11-30 Report List

Page 112: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

92Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical

5 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

6 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

• Filename = Checking a Part.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 11-31 Save Report

Page 113: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

93Chapter 12: Move Device Position

Chapter 12: Move Device Position• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to move

the measurement device to increase the working volume. After completing this section, the student will be able to move the measurement device, allowing them to measure large parts in a single file.

PurposeThe Move Device Position command has two functions:

• It moves the device to a new location within the same coordinate system.

• It realigns the device to the part if the relationship has changed.

Moving the Device

This is the original intent for the Move Device Position command. It allows you measure a part on which the device can not measure the features from one location. Measure 3 or more point-reducible features, run the Move Device Position command, move the device, and remeasure the features.

NOTE: Comp Axis points can not be used in the Move Device Position command. The compensation direction is based upon the active alignment. When the device moves, the active alignment is not valid.

There is a penalty. Every time the device is moved the device may incur

additional error. To minimize the error, the features should be as far apart as possible while still allowing the device to move to the new location.

To maintain very accurate measurements avoid using the Move Device Position command by placing the device in an ideal location.

Page 114: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

94Chapter 12: Move Device Position

Realign the Part to the Device

If the setup gets disturbed, use the Move Device Position command to

reestablish the alignment between the part and the device. There must be 3 or more point-reducible features in the file. They should be as far apart as possible to minimize error.

Important Topics - Move Device Position• The Move Device Position command may be used to move the device

to a new location or to realign the device to the part if the part has moved.

• After using the Move Device Position command, a loss of accuracy may occur.

Page 115: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

95Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

Practical ExerciseIn this exercise align to a CAD file, relocate the Device relative to the part, and realign using the Move Device Position command.

Importing CAD File

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

FIGURE 13-1 FARO Demonstration Part

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-2 Drawing Units

E

12

3

45

6

7

89

10F

A

C D

B

G

P1 P2

P3 P4

Page 116: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

96Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Select AUTO NOMINAL ASSOCIATION.

NOTE: Turning off the Auto Nominal Association will prevent the points measured in this chapter from associating to the nominal CAD file. If the option is On, CAM2 Measure X will associate the measured points to the nominal circle and modify the label from POINTXXX to CIRCLEXXX.

6 ❑ Click OK.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 13-3 Load Tolerances

• Automatically Associate Nominals = clear (or Off).

FIGURE 13-4 Auto Nominal Association

Page 117: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

97Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part2.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 13-5 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part2.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 13-6 Adding CAD Parts

Page 118: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

98Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

9 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

Setting the Coordinate System

Another feature of CAM2 Measure X is the ability to create a new coordinate system by translating or rotating an existing coordinate system. This feature is helpful when you cannot construct a coordinate system from measured features on your part to correspond with the location of the coordinate system of the CAD model. In this exercise, in addition to learning the Move Device Position command, we will also practice translating a coordinate system. The steps below will guide you through the process.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

FIGURE 13-7 FARO_Demo_Part2 CAD file

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 13-8 Measure XY Plane

Page 119: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

99Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

6 ❑ Measure Circle 9.

• Label = PLANE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 13-9 Plane Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-10 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 13-11 Measure Circle 9

Page 120: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

100Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

8 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

9 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

10 ❑ Measure a 2D line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G.

• Label = CIRCLE009_I.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 13-12 Circle 9 Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-13 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 13-14 Measure X Axis

Page 121: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

101Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

12 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

• Label = LINE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 13-15 Line Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. .

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_LINE001.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = M_CIRCLE009_I.

• Select the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-16 3-2-1 Coordinate System

Page 122: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

102Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

14 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < TRANSLATION. Use the following values:

15 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

16 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Select X Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• X Offset = -150.0.

• Select Y Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• Y Offset = -65.0.

• Select Z Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• Z Offset = 0.0.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-17 Translate Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS002.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-18 CAD=Part Alignment

Page 123: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

103Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

Save The Measurements

18 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

Measure Features for the Move Device Position

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINTS > COMP OFF.

FIGURE 13-19 CAD to Part Alignment

• The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Move Device Position.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 13-20 Save As

Page 124: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

104Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

2 ❑ Measure Point 1.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ Measure Point 2.

• Take a point by pressing the FRONT button.

• Press the BACK button to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-21 Measure Point 1

• Label = POINT001.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 13-22 Point 1 Results

• Take a point by pressing the FRONT button.

• Press the BACK button to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-23 Measure Point 2

Page 125: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

105Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ Measure Point 3.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT002.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 13-24 Point 2 Results

• Take a point by pressing the FRONT button.

• Press the BACK button to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-25 Measure Point 3

• Label = POINT003.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 13-26 Point 3 Results

Page 126: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

106Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

8 ❑ Measure Point 4.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Performing the Move Device Position Command

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select MOVE DEVICE POSITION.

NOTE: Using 2D features (Arc, Circle, Slot) CAM2 Measure X requires

• Take a point by pressing the FRONT button.

• Press the BACK button to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-27 Measure Point 4

• Label = POINT004.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 13-28 Point 4 Results

• Selected Choices = M_POINT001, M_POINT002, M_POINT003, M_POINT004.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-29 Move Device Position

Page 127: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

107Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

you to measure a plane for each feature.

2 ❑ Move the Measurment Device (Move the device, or move the part).

3 ❑ Click OK in the MOVE THE DEVICE dialog.

4 ❑ Measure Point 1.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

6 ❑ Measure Point 2.

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

• Take a point by pressing the FRONT button.

• Press the BACK button to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-30 Measure Point 1

• Take a point by pressing the FRONT button.

• Press the BACK button to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-31 Measure Point 2

Page 128: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

108Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

8 ❑ Measure Point 3.

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

10 ❑ Measure Point 4.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the point. The results of the Device Move are displayed.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the new Device Position.

• Take a point by pressing the FRONT button.

• Press the BACK button to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-32 Measure Point 3

• Take a point by pressing the FRONT button.

• Press the BACK button to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-33 Measure Point 4

FIGURE 13-34 Device Position Results

Page 129: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

109Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

Add Measurements to an Existing FeatureIf you have a large feature that can not be totally measured from one location, CAM2 Measure X allows you to add points to the feature. This will update the feature location and all associated constructions, coordinate systems, and dimensions used with this feature.

13 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

14 ❑ Select M_CIRCLE009_I.

15 ❑ Click the EDIT button.

16 ❑ Measure Circle 9.

FIGURE 13-35 Review Features

• Select the ADD READINGS radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-36 Add Readings

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 13-37 Measure Circle 9

Page 130: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

110Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical

The points, or Readings, are now added to the feature and M_CIRCLE009_I is recalculated.

17 ❑ Click on the READINGS tab.

NOTE: The measured circle has points, or Readings, from both device positions.

18 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

FIGURE 13-38 Circle 9 Readings

Page 131: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

111Chapter 14: Tips and Tricks

Chapter 14: Tips and Tricks

The Measurement TrackThere are numerous ways to approach the same task, and some ways are easier than others. This section presents the Measurement Track, a good rule of thumb procedure to help guide you through the measurement tasks.

Examine the Task

Before you start taking measurements, determine why the part is being inspected and what results are expected. Measuring without direction will yield voluminous data that will make it difficult to find the answers to the original question. Knowing the goal in advance will save a great deal of time.

Setup Considerations

Before beginning to measure a part, ensure that the device can reach all the features to be measured. This can eliminate device movements due to the inability to reach features.

Setting the Coordinate System and Alignment

The coordinate system and alignment created will depend on the purpose for measuring the part and the amount of data available. The two most commonly used alignment options are (1) a CAD=Part type alignment to a constructed coordinate system, and (2) an Iterative alignment. Following are some examples of when one method may be preferred to another.

1 Coordinate System / CAD = Part.

• The part requires a specific set of datums be followed.

• The objective is to trouble-shoot the part.

2 Iterative.

• For use if there is no clear datum scheme.

• The datum scheme allows for a best fit.

• If a Coordinate System/CAD=Part approach shows the part to be slightly out of specification. In such a case, it is possible a best fit alignment will show the part to be within specification.

Page 132: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

112Chapter 14: Tips and Tricks

Always set the alignment as soon as possible during a measurement session. Many commands depend upon the alignment to operate correctly.

Save the file as soon as the alignment is complete. If anything goes wrong, reopen the file with the saved alignment. Continue to save frequently.

Data Collection

Although it is probably more efficient to perform the measurements, constructions, and dimensions first, then add nominals at a later time, it is not very practical.

With large parts, it is best to break up the work session into smaller sections. Within each section, perform the measurements within that area and assign their nominals. Follow with the constructions and dimensions, and add their nominals. When each section is done, save the file then move onto the next section.

This process will help prevent confusion with lists of features. All the data in the database will be grouped in the area in which the measurements were taken.

Data Output

Know what sort of output data is expected from the part, IGES data, graphical report, text report, etc.

Remember that printed reports will always be printed in the current coordinate system. If there are multiple coordinate systems, make sure the correct coordinate system is set active before printing.

When exporting CAD data, always complete the CAD = PART alignment command. The data will always be exported in the World Coordinate System. A file without a CAD to Part type alignment will not produce the expected results when the data is imported into another system.

Other Hints

Holes: If features are not on the same plane, modify the AUTO PLANE SELECT preference and choose define. The MEASURE < CIRCLE command will prompt you to measure a plane before each circle. This preferences sets all other 2D commands to work in the same manner.

Surfaces: Choose Select Nominal Surfaces Only in the Auto Nominal Association part preference. This will automatically select the nearest Nominal surface for inspection and not any previously measured features.

Page 133: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

113Chapter 14: Tips and Tricks

Clearing up the view: To clear up the graphics screen:

• Choose VIEW < LAYERS. Entities may be moved from one layer to another. Also, filters may be created and activated to group and sort several layers at once. To clean up the display, filter out those layers you do not wish to view.

• Choose VIEW < ARRANGE LABELS to automatically arrange the on-screen labels. To hide all labels, choose VIEW < PROPERTIES and click the VISUAL OBJECTS tab. Clear the MAIN LABEL VIEW check box and click APPLY.

• Pin or unpin the control bars. Unpin the control bars to minimize them and enlarge the graphics field. When needed, click the icon and the control bar will “fly out” for use. Pin the control bars to anchor them for constant view.

Page 134: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 135: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Advanced Topics

Page 136: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 137: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

117Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD

Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD

• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to use CAD as nominals and establish alignments. CAM2 SPC Graph will be used to create a graphical report. After completing this section, the student will learn how to use CAD as nominals and generate graphical reports.

Why Work with CAD?CAM2 Measure X makes it easy to use CAD as nominals for measurement.

CAD TerminologyTypes of CAD Data

Wireframe: These entities define the outline of a part. They can include points, circles, arcs, lines, polylines, and splines. A polyline is a bunch of line segments stitched together to approximate a curve. A spline is simple curve.

Surface: A surface is used to define the outer boundary of a part. Surfaces are typically used to define the geometry of complex curved parts, such as automotive and aerospace sheet metal parts. Surfaces are very popular for creating cutting paths for CNC cutting tools.

Solid: A solid model is also used to define the outer boundary of a part, but solids have a thickness or mass. Solid modeling is popular for the design of a variety of parts. Many CAD systems start with a solid model then create the 2D drawings and 3D surfaces from the solid.

Page 138: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

118Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD

Standard CAD Data File Formats

The following CAD data file formats are included with CAM2 Measure X. Translators for other CAD data file formats are available and must be purchased from FARO.

IGES

IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Standard) was created to standardize data transfer between different CAD systems. IGES works very well for surface and wireframe entities, but not for text and dimensions.

3DM

3DM is the native file format for Rhinoceros® software (Rhino 3D). Rhino can create, edit, analyze, and translate NURBS curves, surfaces, and solids. Supported formats include DWG/DXF, SAT (ACIS), X_T (Parasolid), STEP, VDA and IGES among others.

VDA

VDA is similar to IGES in that it is a standard used to translate data between different CAD systems. VDA is particularly prevalent in Europe.

Page 139: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

119Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD

Measurement TemplateThe Measurement Template command provides a quick method to create nominals, assign nominals, and guide you in the measurement of the part. You can run the Measurement Template command any time during the measurement process, but its primary function is to save time in the preliminary measurement and alignment tasks.

NOTE: A CAD file is not required to run the MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE command.

Iterative Alignment (Best Fit)The ITERATIVE alignment command allows the use of several point-reducible features to best-fit them to their corresponding nominal values.

FIGURE 15-1 M = Measured data N =Nominal data

3

75

1

7

53

1

M

N

Page 140: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

120Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD

Unlike CAD=PART, ITERATIVE does not require a constructed coordinate system. CAM2 Measure X will use the coordinate system defined in the CAD model.

Automatic Nominal AssociationAfter a CAD to Part alignment is complete, CAM2 Measure X will automatically look for the nearest nominal feature and associate it to the current measurement. Auto Nominal is an option in PREFERENCES. The default setting is ON when CAM2 Measure X is installed.

NOTE: Changing the label of the measured feature in the RESULTS dialog box will change the label of any nominal that has been automatically associated.

Important Topics - Checking a Part With CAD

• CAD files can be translated though IGES, VDA, CATIA® v4 and v5, Unigraphics®, Parasolid®, SolidWorks®, Solid Edge® and OpenNURBS formats.

• Always add CAD data before measuring.

• At least 3 point reducible features are required for the ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT command.

FIGURE 15-1 M = Measured data N =Nominal data

7

53

1M

N

Page 141: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

121Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Practical ExerciseUse a CAD file for nominal information. Measure alignment features, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, modify the on-screen labels, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Translating an IGES File

Always translate, and add CAD data to the drawing file before doing any measurements. If the features are measured first and then the CAD data is added, the results may be poor because the CAD data and measurements may not align properly.

FIGURE 16-1 FARO Demonstration Part

E

12

3

45

6

7

89

10F

A

C D

B

G

P1 P2

P3 P4

Page 142: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

122Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 16-3 Load Tolerances

Page 143: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

123Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 16-4 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 16-5 Adding CAD Parts

Page 144: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

124Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X can translate the IGES, VDA, CATIA® v4 and v5, Unigraphics®, Parasolid®, SolidWorks®, Solid Edge® and OpenNURBS formats.

Measuring the Alignment Features

Circles 1, 3, and 7 are the features for the Alignment. Use the Measurement Template command and choose these three nominal features from the CAD model. The MEASURE TEMPLATE command automatically guides you though the measurement of the three circles.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

FIGURE 16-6 FARO_Demo_Part1 CAD file

• From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select Circle.

• Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 16-7 Measurement Template

Page 145: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

125Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

2 ❑ Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template.

• Click on Circle 1 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 16-8 Circle 1

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 highlights red.

FIGURE 16-9 Circle 1 Results

• Click on Circle 3 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 16-10 Circle 3

Page 146: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

126Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE003.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 and Circle 3 highlights red.

FIGURE 16-11 Circle 3 Results

• Click on Circle 7 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 16-12 Circle 7

• Label = CIRCLE007.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1, Circle 3 and Circle 7 highlights red.

FIGURE 16-13 Circle 7 Results

Page 147: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

127Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

8 ❑ Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and return to the Measurment Template.

9 ❑ Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not been measured; however, CAM2 has an option to define a plane during a 2D feature command.

10 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

FIGURE 16-14 Measurement Template

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-15 Select Plane

Page 148: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

128Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Notice that Circle 1 highlights red. This is to guide to the correct circle.

11 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

12 ❑ Measure circle 1.

13 ❑ Take a look at the results and click OK to continue.

14 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 16-16 Measure XY Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 16-17 Measure Circle 1

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-18 Select Plane

Page 149: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

129Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

15 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

16 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

17 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 16-19 Measure Circle 3

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-20 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 16-21 Measure Circle 7

Page 150: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

130Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Setting an Iterative Alignment

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command will stop. The calculations may solve quickly and not appear to change.

FIGURE 16-22 Measurement Results

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001, M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE007.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-23 Iterative Alignment

Page 151: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

131Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Save The Measurements

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

Measure the Remaining Features

Now that the part has been aligned to the CAD data, continue to measure the remaining features on the part. Notice that when measuring features, a representation of the probe on the screen that shows the current location of the probe.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

• Check the MAX ERROR of the Iterative Alignment. For this part the value should be in tolerance.

• Notice the error between each of the measured circles and its associated nominal.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 16-24 Iterative Alignment Results

• File name = Cad to Part.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 16-25 Save As

Page 152: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

132Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

NOTE: All of the circles on this part are in the same plane, therefore any of the circles can be selected as the plane for the next measured circle.

3 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

Notice that there is more information in the RESULTS dialog box for each measured circle. After a CAD to Part alignment has been completed CAM2 Measure X automatically searches for a nominal for each measured feature. If a nominal is found, it is automatically associated to the measured feature. You will the see the comparison between the measured and nominal features.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-26 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 16-27 Measure Circle 5

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 16-28 Circle 5 Results

Page 153: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

133Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Modifying On-Screen Labels

Take a look at the screen. Before running the REVIEW FEATURES command to print a report, add more information to the on-screen labels and arrange the labels in the graphics field.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Choose each of the measured circles. Hold down CTRL key and click the left mouse button to pick each circle.

3 ❑ Click on the LABELS tab.

4 ❑ Select the Tolerance Bar, Actual, Nominal, and Deviation check boxes. Notice that the labels in the Preview window are updating.

5 ❑ Click OK to exit the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box. Now, arrange the labels around the part.

6 ❑ Press the L hot key to automatically arrange the labels around the graphics filed.

7 ❑ Use the mouse and drag, left mouse click and hold, any of the on-screen labels to another area of the graphics filed and release the mouse button to finish.

FIGURE 16-29 Labels tabs

Page 154: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

134Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

• Operator’s Name = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = CAD to Part.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-30 Enter Header Information

Page 155: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

135Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = unchecked.NOTE: Since you manually arranged the on-screen labels, make sure that this check box is cleared.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-31 Report List

Page 156: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

136Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

• Filename = CAD to Part.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 16-32 Save Report

Page 157: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

137Chapter 17: Surface Measurement

Chapter 17: Surface Measurement• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to inspect

a part with points. After this section, the student will be able to align a CAD model and compare any point on a part to a CAD surface. They will also be able to learn how to check a specific XYZ coordinate and compare it to the nominal.

Why Measure a Surface?There are two major reasons to measure curved surfaces: to see if the shape of the part is correct, or to see if a component is located correctly in an assembly.

Tools and fixtures may be measured to compare them to the nominal CAD surfaces of the part. This often helps to identify problems in manufacturing when trying to determine if a tool is the source of a problem or if the component is out of specification.

Surface Measurement CommandsInspect Surface

This is the easiest way to measure a surface. After selecting the INSPECT SURFACE command, place the probe on the part, press the FRONT button, pull back, and press the BACK button. CAM2 Measure X will compare the measured point to the surface.

Surface Edge Point

This point checks the trim edge of a part to the edge of a CAD surface. After selecting the SURFACE EDGE POINT command, place the probe on the part, press the FRONT button, pull back and press the BACK button. CAM2 Measure X will compare the measured point to the surface edge.

Surface Point

If a CAD surface is not available and you need to measure a point on a surface, use the SURFACE POINT command. After selecting the SURFACE POINT command, measure three or more points in a small triangular pattern, then pull off the surface and press the BACK button. The points are used to determine the surface normal vector, which is then used for probe compensation. This results in an XYZ point with an IJK vector.

Page 158: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

138Chapter 17: Surface Measurement

Home In Point

To measure a surface at a specific location, use the HOME IN command. This is one of the more complex functions within CAM2 Measure X, but it is extremely useful when checking tools, jigs, and fixtures.

There is a small question of probe compensation. CAM2 Measure X provides three different probe compensation options.

• Option 1 - Key in IJK compensation direction (if it is known).

• Option 2 - Extract the compensation direction from a CAD surface. This direction is the normal vector of the surface at the XYZ point location.

• Option 3 - Sample the compensation direction from the part surface by measuring the surface. Sample surface requires three points in a mini-plane (FRONT button) and one compensation point (BACK button).

If the vector is known, use Option 1. If a CAD surface is available, use Option 2. If the vector is not known and a CAD surface is not available, use Option 3.

Since it is very difficult to move the probe to an exact XYZ location, the HOME IN command requires a HOME IN ZONE or diameter. The home in zone allows you to take a point within a cylindrical area around the point.

Important Topics - Surface Measurement• The two reasons to check a surface:

1 To see if the shape of the part is correct.

2 To see if a component is located correctly in a assembly.

• The three options for the probe compensation vector are:

1 Key In2 Select Surface3 Sample Surface

Page 159: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

139Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

Practical ExerciseUse a CAD file for nominal information. Measure alignment features and construct a measured coordinate system, complete an alignment, check a few surfaces by measuring surface points, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Translating and Adding the CAD data

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

FIGURE 18-1 FARO Demonstration Bracket

S1

S2

Instructors Comments

Page 160: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

140Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 18-3 Load Tolerances

Page 161: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

141Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Filename = Bracket1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 18-4 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Filename = Bracket1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 18-5 Adding CAD Parts

Page 162: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

142Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

Measuring and Creating an Alignment

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

FIGURE 18-6 Bracket1 CAD file

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 18-7 Measure XY Plane

Page 163: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

143Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

6 ❑ Measure the line.

• Label = PLANE001.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure the plane.

FIGURE 18-8 Plane Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-9 Select Plane

• Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 18-10 Measure Line 1

S1

S2

Page 164: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

144Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

8 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 18-11 Line Results

• Take the three or four points along the S1 edge by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 18-12 Measure Line 2

• Label = LINE002.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 18-13 Line Results

S1

S2

Page 165: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

145Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

A plane and two lines can be used to construct a Line/Line Intersection coordinate system.

10 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

FIGURE 18-14 CAD Model with Measured Alignment Features

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.

• Select a Line = M_LINE002.

• Click the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-15 Line/Line Coordinate System

Page 166: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

146Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

CAD=Part

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

Save the Measurements

This was a lot of work, save the file.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-16 CAD=Part Alignment

FIGURE 18-17 Aligned to CAD Model

Page 167: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

147Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Surface Measurement.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 18-18 Save As

Page 168: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

148Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

Checking a Surface

After a CAD to Part alignment has been completed CAM2 Measure X will try to associate the closest nominal feature to any measurement. For Surface point measurements the default preferences are to select all surfaces both measured and nominal. Since this CAD model is complete, changing this surface option to ignore the measured surfaces will make the measuring process easier.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ Select AUTO NOMINAL ASSOCIATION.

3 ❑ Click OK.

Inspect the surfaces of the CAD model.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

• Automatically Associate Nominals = checked (or On).

• Features:

• Nominal Feature Search Radius = 5.0.

• Display Nominal Result = unchecked (or Off).

• Surfaces = Select Nominal Surfaces Only.

FIGURE 18-19 Auto Nominal Association

• Move the probe close to the part; the nearest surface will turn red.

• Press the FRONT button to measure, pull the probe away from the surface, and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 18-20 Measuring a Inspect Surface Point

Page 169: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

149Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ Repeat the command and measure more surface points.

Checking an Edge

Since we are checking an edge there will be 3 surfaces within the Auto Nominal zone (top, bottom and side). The Auto Nominal function may not select the correct surface. By turning off the Auto Nominal and selecting the surface manually the correct surface can be selected.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ Select AUTO NOMINAL ASSOCIATION.

3 ❑ Click OK.

• The results displayed are the X,Y, Z, and the distance to the surface.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-21 Inspect Surface Point Results

• Automatically Associate Nominals = clear (or Off).

FIGURE 18-22 Auto Nominal Association

Page 170: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

150Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE EDGE POINT.

5 ❑ Measure the point.

• Using the mouse, left mouse click to select the upper surface.

NOTE: A drop-down menu will appear listing all the surfaces and curves near the area selected. As you scroll down the drop down list, the surface or curve will highlight red.

• Left click to chose the appropriate surface or curve.

FIGURE 18-23 Select the Surface

• Place the probe on the edge of the part near the red surface.

• Press the FRONT button to measure, pull the probe away from the surface, and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 18-24 Measuring a Surface Edge Point

S1

S2

Page 171: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

151Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ Measure some more surface edges.

Using Home In Points

For this example, construct a few nominal points.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < ENTER VALUES. Use the following values:

Measure Point 1 using the Home In command and an entered (key in) vector.

• The results displayed are the X,Y, Z, and the 3D deviation to the surface.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-25 Surface Edge Point Results

X Y Z

Point 1 55.0 36.5 41.0

Point 2 95.0 36.5 41.0

Point 3 135.0 36.5 41.0

• Enter the nominal information from the table above.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK to create the point

• Click OK to accept the nominal results.

• Repeat the command for each point.

FIGURE 18-26 Construct Point Enter Values

Page 172: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

152Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

3 ❑ Move the probe to the part and follow the on-screen guide to the point.

Measure Point 2 using the Home In command and sample the surface to determine the vector for compensation.

NOTE: For this option the approach vector will be different than the compensation vector. The approach will be set along the direction of the current view.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

• Click the ADD button.

• Coordinate = N_POINT001. Use the COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM

SCREEN button to select the point.

• Approach Vector = KEY IN.

• Approach Vector: I=0, J=-1, K=0

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box and begin measuring.

FIGURE 18-27 Create Home In Point

• Press the FRONT button, to measure when the probe is in the zone.

• Notice the measurements and the comparison to the nominal point in the RESULTS dialog box.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 18-28 Home-in Results

• Click the ADD button.

FIGURE 18-29 Create Home In Point

Page 173: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

153Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

5 ❑ Move the probe to the part and follow on-screen guide to an enlarged home-in zone. Measure three points by pressing the FRONT button.

6 ❑ Use a triangular pattern just as measuring a surface point. This will determine the compensation vector.

• Pull back and press the BACK button to define the compensation vector direction.

7 ❑ Move the probe to the part and follow the guide to the point.

Measure Point 3 using the Home In command and select the surface to determine the vector for probe compensation.

• Coordinate = N_POINT002. Use the COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM

SCREEN button to select the point.

• Approach Vector = SAMPLE SURFACE.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box and begin measuring.

• Press the FRONT button, to measure when in the zone.

• Notice the measurements and the comparison to the nominal point in the RESULTS dialog box.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 18-30 Home-in Results

FIGURE 18-29 Create Home In Point

Page 174: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

154Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

8 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

9 ❑ Take a look at the Output Bar. CAM2 Measure X is prompting to select a surface.

• Click the ADD button.

• Coordinate = N_POINT003. Use the COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM

SCREEN button to select the point.

• Approach Vector = SELECT SURFACE.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box and begin measuring.

FIGURE 18-31 Create Home In Point

• Left mouse click on the top surface near the point.

• Select the correct Surface.

FIGURE 18-32 Select a Surface

Page 175: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

155Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

10 ❑ Move the probe to the part and follow on-screen guide to the point.

• Press the FRONT button, to measure when in the zone.

• Pull back from the surface and Press the BACK button for compensation.

• Notice the measurements and the comparison to the nominal surface in the RESULTS dialog box.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 18-33 Home-in Results

Page 176: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

156Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Surface Measurement.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-34 Enter Header Information

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-35 Report List

Page 177: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

157Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

• File name = Surface Measurement.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 18-36 Save Report

Page 178: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 179: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Practical ExerciseSet the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of the plate will be your base plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-axis and origin, respectively.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

FIGURE 19-1 Faro Demonstration Bracket

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-2 Drawing Units

S1

S2

159Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 180: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 19: Scanning an

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 19-3 Load Tolerances

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = Bracket1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 19-4 FARO CAD Translator

160d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 181: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ZOOM ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

Measuring and Creating an Alignment

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = Bracket1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 19-5 Adding CAD Parts

FIGURE 19-6 Bracket 1.igs file

161Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 182: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 19: Scanning an

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 19-7 Measure XY Plane

• Label = PLANE001.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure the fea-ture.

FIGURE 19-8 Plane Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are pro-jected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-9 Select Plane

162d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 183: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training Workbookn 1.0 - January 2008

Versio

6 ❑ Measure the line.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

8 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

• Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK but-ton.

FIGURE 19-10 Measure Line 1

• Label = LINE001.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 19-11 Line Results

• Take the three or four points on the S1 edge by pressing the FRONT but-ton.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK but-ton.

FIGURE 19-12 Measure Line 2

S1

S2

S1

S2

163Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 184: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 19: Scanning an

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

10 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

• Label = LINE002.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 19-13 Line Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.

• Select a Line = M_LINE002.

• Click the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-14 Line/Line coordinate system

164d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 185: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

CAD=Part

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

4 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-15 CAD=Part Alignment

• File name = Surface Profile.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 19-16 Save As

165Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 186: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 19: Scanning a

166

Scan Measurement Preference

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

3 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, select MISCELLANEOUS.

4 ❑ Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

• Type of Scanning = Start/Pause Scan With Trigger.

• Maximum Distance = 1000000000000.

• Minimum Distance = 2.0.

FIGURE 19-17 Feature Scanning

• Save Scan Lines as Fea-tures = Yes.

FIGURE 19-18 Feature Scanning

nd Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 187: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Parallel Lock Planes

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN < PARALLEL LOCK PLANES.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

3 ❑ Scan the surface.

NOTE: Scan one surface at a time.

• Increment = 10.0 (0.50 in).

• Number of Planes = 100.

• Minimum Distance = 0.5 (0.05 in).

• Save As = Open Polylines.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-19 Parallel Lock Plane Scan

• Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-20 Select Plane

• Press the FRONT button to begin scanning.

• Move the probe across the surface contour.

• Press the FRONT button to pause the scan.

• Press the BACK button to end the scan.

FIGURE 19-21 Parallel Locked Scanning

167Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 188: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 19: Scanning an

168

4 ❑ Save the scan data.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the polyline results.

Show Surface Deviation

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Select the M_SURFACE###-### polyline features.

3 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Rescale Whiskers

The whiskers will now give a graphical display of deviation to the CAD surface. A green whisker shows a deviation less than the tolerance. A yellow whisker shows deviation greater than seventy-five percent of the tolerance. A red whisker shows a deviation greater than the tolerance.

1 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select WHISKER > DECREASE. This will reduce the whisker length.

2 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select WHISKER > INCREASE. This will increase the whisker length.

• To keep the scan data, press the FRONT button.

• To discard the scan data, press the BACK button.

FIGURE 19-22 Keep Data?

• Readings = checked.

• Whiskers = checked.

FIGURE 19-23 Surface Whiskers

d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 189: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Rescale the Whiskers on the part to best view the deviation.

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

FIGURE 19-24 Whiskers

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Surface Pro-file.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-25 Enter Header Information

169Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 190: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 19: Scanning an

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST dialog box shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW dialog box shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit the REPORT PREVIEW dialog box.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box.

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• Select all M_SURFACE###-### fea-tures. All other features unchecked.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-26 Report List

• Filename = Sur-face Profile.

• Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 19-27 Save Report

170d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 191: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Point Measurement• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate how to use

points for inspection. After completing this section, the student will be able to use the surface point commands to inspect parts.

Point MeasurementsComp Off and Comp Axis

Comp Off points do not compensate. The point will be taken at the center of the probe. These points are idea for use in all Device Position commands and to check movement in the part or measurement device. Comp Axis points will compensate along a coordinate axis, so they may only be used to measure surfaces that are parallel to the coordinate planes: XY, YZ, and XZ. the

BACK button must be pressed after pulling away perpendicular to the coordinate plane the point will compensate towards.

High Point and Low Point

These commands will find the point furthest (High Point) or nearest (Low Point) to a Plane, Line, or Point. When the Scan Measurement Part Preference is On, these commands capture points as it receives them from the measurement device.

Surface Measurements

If the surface is not parallel to a coordinate plane, the Surface Point

command must be used. This command uses three or more measured points and a compensation point to calculate a single point on a small planar surface.

Probe Center

XYZ to beinspected

How do we determine thevector?

Surface

171Chapter 20: Point Measurement

Page 192: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Point Measu

The Home in command guides the measurement device to a specific XYZ

location to measure a point.

CAM2 Measure X provides three different probe compensation options for the Home in command.

• Option 1 - Key in IJK compensation direction (if it is known).

• Option 2 - Extract the compensation direction from a CAD surface. This direction is the normal vector of the surface, at the XYZ point location.

• Option 3 - Sample the compensation direction from the part surface by measuring the surface. Sample surface requires three points in a mini-plane (FRONT button) and one compensation point (BACK button).

If the vector is known, use Option 1. If a CAD surface is available, use Option 2. If the vector is not known and a CAD surface is not available, use Option 3.

Since it is very difficult to move the probe to an exact XYZ location, the Home In command requires a Home In Zone. The surface you are measuring should approximate a flat plane within the Home In zone. If the surface is curved, your measurement may include cosine error.

Home In Zone (diameter)

Home In Vector

Final Compensated Point

Home In Vector

R Cur

vatur

e

R ZoneR Zone

Surface

Measured point with error

172rement

Page 193: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

To calculate the maximum Home In Zone, use the following equation:

Enter the maximum acceptable cosine error and the radius of curvature of the surface and get the maximum allowable Home In Zone radius. Usually, the cosine error will be much smaller than the accuracy of the measurement device.

Checking the Same Points on Another Part

The list of points in the Home In command may be saved to file. CAM2 Measure X creates an ASCII text file with all the data. The Home In command can import the file to check the same location on another similar part. The Home In file has the extension *.hmi.

The Home In command also saves and imports the ACL format (GOTO/ X, Y, Z, I, J, K). The ACL file has the extension *.acl.

Important Topics - Point Measurement• Home In Point files (*.hmi) allow you to save a series of home-in

points to be saved for use in other measurement sessions.

• The Select Surface Home In option requires a CAD surface.

R Zone:= RCurvature2 _ R( Curvature _ ErrorCosine)2

173Chapter 20: Point Measurement

Page 194: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 195: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical

PRACTICAL - Surface Measurement1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 21-2 Load Tolerances

175Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical

Page 196: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measu

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = Bracket1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 21-3 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = Bracket1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 21-4 Adding CAD Parts

176rement Practical

Page 197: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ZOOM ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

Measuring the Alignment Features

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

FIGURE 21-5 Bracket 1.igs file

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 21-6 Measure XY Plane

177Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical

Page 198: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measu

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

6 ❑ Measure the line.

• Label = PLANE001.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-7 Plane Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-8 Select Plane

• Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK but-ton.

FIGURE 21-9 Measure Line 1

S1

S2

178rement Practical

Page 199: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

8 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-10 Line Results

• Take the three or four points along the S1 edge by pressing the FRONT but-ton.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK but-ton.

FIGURE 21-11 Measure Line 2

• Label = LINE002.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-12 Line Results

S1

S2

179Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical

Page 200: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measu

Constructing the Alignment

The correct amount of measured features for a Line/Line Intersection coordinate system has been measured. These features are a measured match for the nominal coordinate system.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

FIGURE 21-13 CAD Model with Measured Alignment Features

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.

• Select a Line = M_LINE002.

• Click the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK to create the coordinate system.

FIGURE 21-14 Line/Line Coordinate System

180rement Practical

Page 201: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

High Points

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-15 CAD=Part Alignment

FIGURE 21-16 Aligned to CAD Model

181Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical

Page 202: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measu

2 ❑ From PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

3 ❑ Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

NOTE: The SCAN MEASUREMENT may be turned on or off using the X key on the keyboard.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HIGH POINT.

5 ❑ Place the probe on the top of the sphere.

• Type of Scanning = Start/Pause Scan With Trigger

• Maximum Distance = 1000000000000.

• Minimum Distance = 0.0.

FIGURE 21-17 Scan Measurement Preference

• Select a Feature = M_PLANE001.

• Feature Type = Plane Reducible.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-18 Select Feature

• Press the FRONT but-ton and scan over the top of the surface.

• Press the FRONT but-ton to pause the scan.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 21-19 Measure High Point

182rement Practical

Page 203: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Home-in Options

Before using the Home-in function to inspect points, create some of the nominal points that will be checked.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < ENTER VALUES.

• Label = POINT001.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re-measure the fea-ture.

FIGURE 21-20 Point Results

Label X Y Z

HMI_1 55.00 36.50 41.00

HMI_2 55.00 49.00 66.20

HMI_3 55.00 25.00 14.49

• Enter the nominal information from the table above.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Choose the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK to create the point

FIGURE 21-21 Construct Point Enter Values

183Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical

Page 204: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measu

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

3 ❑ Repeat these steps for each point.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

5 ❑ From PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

6 ❑ Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

Three Coordinates, Key-in I, J, K

1 ❑ From MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

• Label = see table.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 21-22 Point Results

• Type of Scanning = No Scanning.

FIGURE 21-23 Scan Measurement Preference

184rement Practical

Page 205: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Click the ADD button.

NOTE: The approach vector is 0,-1,0. This is known because of the orientation of the part. The approach is from the negative Y direction, so a negative J value is used. Note how only the Y value will change when the point is measured.

• Coordinate = N_HMI_1.

• Approach Vector: I = 0, J = -1, K = 0.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Rotation Angle = 0.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Approach Vector = KEY IN.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-24 Create Home In Point

185Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical

Page 206: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measu

Three Coordinates, Select Surface

1 ❑ Click the ADD button.

NOTE: The approach vector will be extracted from the surface, normal to the surface at the location of the nominal point.

Three Coordinates, Sample Surface

1 ❑ Click the ADD button.

NOTE: The approach vector is calculated from the small sampled plane that is digitized within a enlarged Home In Zone. This method should be used in the absence of CAD surfaces.

Save the Home In File

Before measuring the Home In Points, save the points to a file that may be imported directly into the Home In command later. This is an excellent way of taking point and vector data on one part and then using the XYZ, IJK data to inspect another part using the Home In format.

• Coordinate = N_HMI_2.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Rotation Angle = 0.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Approach Vector = SELECT SURFACE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-25 Create Home In Point

• Coordinate = N_HMI_3.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Rotation Angle = 0.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Approach Vector = SAMPLE SURFACE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-26 Create Home In Point

186rement Practical

Page 207: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

1 ❑ Click the EXPORT FILE button.

Measure the Home In Points

1 ❑ Click the OK button in the HOME IN POINT dialog box to start measuring the three points.

2 ❑ Measure HMI_1.

NOTE: One measurement point is required to capture the point. The measured point will be offset for the radius of the probe along the surface vector that was entered.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• File name = your initials - Home In.

• Save as Type = Home In Files (*.hmi).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 21-27 Save HIM file.

• Label = HMI_1.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-28 Point Results

187Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical

Page 208: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measu

4 ❑ CAM2 Measure is prompting the operator to select a surface of HMI_2.

5 ❑ Measure HMI_2.

NOTE: One measurement point and one compensation point is required to capture the point. The compensation point is required to determine which side of the CAD surface the point was measured.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ Measure HMI_3.

NOTE: Four measurement points and one compensation point are required to capture the point. The first three measurement and compensation points are used to determine the surface vector. The last measurement point is used to capture the point.

• Using the mouse click on the top surface.

• Select the face on the outer surface of the part.

FIGURE 21-29 Select Surface

• Label = HMI_2.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-30 Point Results

S1

S2

188rement Practical

Page 209: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = HMI_3.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button but-ton twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-31 Point Results

189Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical

Page 210: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 211: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Sheet Metal Measurement

Sheet Metal Measurements• OBJECTIVE: To understand how sheet metal

measurements differ from regular measurement types. The student will learn techniques on how to measure sheet metal trim lines.

Simple Features

Sheet metal measurements are very similar to ordinary measurements. Arcs,

circles, 2D lines, and slots are measured with the same method as

normal measurements, with the exception of adding a material thickness.

The reason for material thickness is due to the difficulty keeping the probe on the edge of a very thin piece of sheet metal. Falling off the edge of the sheet metal would cause an incorrect value for feature size and incorrect position.

CAM2 Measure X compensates for the possibility of falling off the edge with simple geometry functions using the measured plane of projection and the thickness value entered for the material.

Unique Sheet Metal Measurements

There are two specific sheet metal measurements: Edge Point and Hemmed Edge Point.

The Trimmed Edge Point command is for measuring a point on the sheet metal edge, which may then be compared to a nominal line or curve representing the nominal edge.

The Hemmed Edge Point command is for measuring a point on a hemmed edge. A hemmed edge is one piece of sheet metal folded over the end of another piece of sheet metal, like on the edge of a car door.

Radius for Compensation

Material Edge

Probe Equator

Ball Probe

191Chapter 22: Sheet Metal Measurement

Page 212: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Sheet Metal

Both the Trimmed Edge and the Hemmed Edge points require a sheet metal thickness value. Both are measured by digitizing three points near the edge, in a small plane, and two points on the edge, next to the plane. The resulting point compensates for the probe and the sheet metal thickness and calculates a point.

Surface Points

Sheet metal parts may also be measured using the surface point commands, Home In, Inspect Surface, and Surface Point. Since these commands are not specific to sheet metal measurements, the material thickness must be activated manually. The M hot key displays the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog box while any sheet metal command is active. Material Thickness may also be set in preferences. Only sheet metal commands will use the material thickness value.

CAD Side and Other Side

There are situations with many sheet metal parts where the nominal point is on the other side of the sheet metal surface. Since the material thickness is constant throughout the part, CAM2 Measure allows the measurement of a sheet metal part from the other side.

This setting is all about what side of the part that is being touched with the probe, the CAD SIDE, or the OTHER SIDE.

FIGURE 22-1 Other Side

CAD Side

Other Side(Nominal)

192 Measurement

Page 213: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Dynamic Nominals

With CAM2 Measure X, any type of nominal feature may be associated to any type of measured feature. This is called Dynamic Nominals. For Example:

Measured circles may use a nominal line to compare X, Y and Z values. The nominal line does not contain a diameter. CAM2 Measure will deactivate the diameter tolerance.

Important Facts - Sheet Metal and Fixture Measurement

• It is important to enter the correct material thickness for sheet metal measurements.

• For Inspect Surface points to compensate through the material, the OTHER SIDE Sheet Metal option will be selected.

• Dynamic nominals will not auto-nominal. They must associated manually.

FIGURE 22-2 Dynamic Nominals

Nominal Line

Measured Circle

193Chapter 22: Sheet Metal Measurement

Page 214: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 215: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

PRACTICAL EXERCISE1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click MATERIAL.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 23-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 23-2 Load Tolerances

• Material Compensation = checked.

• Direction = CAD Side.

• Thickness = Single.

• Material Thickness = 3.175.

FIGURE 23-3 Material Compensation

195Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 216: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = Shell1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 23-4 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = Shell1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 23-5 Adding CAD Parts

196 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 217: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen (or press the 7 key).

Constructing Nominals

10 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

FIGURE 23-6 Shell1.igs

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 23-7 Construct P1

197Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 218: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

12 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• Label = P1.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 23-8 Circle Results

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 23-9 Construct P2

198 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 219: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

14 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• Label = P2.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 23-10 Circle Results

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Using the mouse click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 23-11 Construct P3

199Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 220: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

15 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Using the Measurement Template

16 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

17 ❑ Click OK in the MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE dialog to measure the three circles.

18 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Label = P3.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 23-12 Circle Results

• Click the FROM SCREEN button .

• Using the mouse, select the 3 nominal circles P1, P2, and P3.

• Click the right mouse button to return to the MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE dialog.

• Change the MEASURE AS drop downs from CIRCLE to PLNPNT (Planar Point).

FIGURE 23-13 Measurement Template

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 23-14 Select Plane

200 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 221: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

19 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

20 ❑ Measure P1.

21 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

22 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-15 Measure XY Plane

• Take one or two points in the hole by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-16 Measure P1

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 23-17 Select Plane

201Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 222: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

23 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

24 ❑ Measure P2.

25 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

26 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-18 Measure XY Plane

• Take one or two points in the hole by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-19 Measure P2

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 23-20 Select Plane

202 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 223: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

27 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

28 ❑ Measure P3.

29 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

Iterative Alignment

1 ❑ Fom the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-21 Measure XY Plane

• Take one or two points in the hole by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-22 Measure P3

• Select M_P1, M_P2 and M_P3.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 23-23 Iterative Alignment

203Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 224: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

Compare to Straight Nominal Edge

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

3 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < TRIMMED POINT.

4 ❑ Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same values entered earlier.

• CAM2 Measure will create a line with 2 points.

• Use the mouse to click 2 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points right.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 23-24 Construct Nominal Line

• Label = LINE001.

• Click OK to accept the line.

FIGURE 23-25 Line Results

204 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 225: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

6 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the shell.

7 ❑ Measure the edge.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 23-26 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the top of the shell by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-27 Measure Plane

• Take two or three points on the edge by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the edge and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-28 Construct Nominal Line

205Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 226: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

9 ❑ Click the REPORT tab and view the results.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

• Select Nominal = N_LINE001.

FIGURE 23-29 Trimmed Point Results

FIGURE 23-30 Trimmed Point Results

206 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 227: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Compare Nominal Circles

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

3 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < CIRCLE.

4 ❑ Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same values entered earlier.

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 23-31 Construct Circle 13

• Label = CIRCLE_13.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 23-32 Circle Results

207Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 228: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

6 ❑ Measure the plane on the side of the shell.

7 ❑ Measure the circle.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 23-33 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the side of the shell by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-34 Measure Plane

• Take three or four points on the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the circle and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-35 Measure Circle

208 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 229: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

9 ❑ Click the REPORT tab to view the results.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

Compare Nominal Round Slots

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select ROUND SLOT < NOMINAL.

• Select Nominal = N_CIRCLE_13.

FIGURE 23-36 Measured Circle Results

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 6 points (or 2 circles with 3 points each).

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points to the right.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 23-37 Construct Slot F

209Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 230: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

3 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < ROUND SLOT.

4 ❑ Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same values entered earlier.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

6 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the shell.

• Label = SLOT_F.

• Click OK to accept the slot.

FIGURE 23-38 Round Slot Results

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 23-39 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the top of the shell by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-40 Measure Plane

210 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 231: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Measure the slot.

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

9 ❑ Click the REPORT tab to view the results.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the slot.

• Take three or four points on the first end of the slot by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull to the center of the arc and press the BACK button.

• Take three or four points on the second end of the slot by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull to the center of the arc and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-41 Measure Round Slot

• Select Nominal = N_SLOT_F.

FIGURE 23-42 Round Slot Results

211Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 232: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

Compare Nominal Surfaces

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

2 ❑ Click the M hot key on the keyboard to bring up the Material Thickness dialog box.

3 ❑ Click OK to accept the material thickness.

4 ❑ Measure a point on the opposite side of the material.

Note: Even though you took the point on the opposite side of the part CAM2 Measure compensated the extra amount for the material.

• Material Compensation = checked.

• Direction = Other Side.

• Thickness = Single.

• Material Thickness = 3.175.

FIGURE 23-43 Material Compensation

• Move the probe to the underside of the part. When the surface turns red click the FRONT button

• Pull away from the sur-face and click the BACK button.

FIGURE 23-44

212 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 233: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

• Label = SURFACE001.

FIGURE 23-45 Inspect Surface Results

213Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 234: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

214

and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 235: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Instructors Comments

Enter Comments Here

Chapter 24: Round Tubing• Objective - The instructor will introduce the tube

measurement routines in CAM2 Measure. Upon completion of this section, the student will be able to measure tubes, construct nominal tubes, and generate an inspection report.

Tubing Part Preferences

Tubing Turn Direction - Clockwise or Counterclockwise. This preference will be based upon the tube-bending machine. When the machine turns the tube it may be rotated in the clockwise or counterclockwise (default) direction. Changing this preference will affect the nominal construction and measurement report.

Tubing Turn Angle - Relative or Absolute. This preference will be based upon the bending machine. When the machine bends the angle the bend is referenced to the first segment (absolute) or to the last segment (relative - default). Changing this preference will affect the nominal construction and measurement report.

Break Point Type - Intersection or Segment End. This preference will construct the intersection points from the intersection of the cylinder segments (Intersection - default) or the intersections of the cylinders with the toroid (Segment End).

Measure Tube Bends - All Bends or Required Bends. This preference determines if the toroid of the tube will be measured. When set to All Bends, you will measure the cylinders and bends. When set to Required Bends (default), only bend angles of 180 degrees will be measured.

FIGURE 24-1 Tubing Preferences

215Chapter 24: Round Tubing

Page 236: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Round Tubin

Measure TubeRound Tube

The MEASURE ROUND TUBE command links a series of plane, cylinder and torus commands to construct a single round tube. End B is the first feature to be measured and will be measured as a plane. End A is the last feature to be measured and is also measured as a plane.

Rectangular Tube

The MEASURE RECTANGULAR TUBE command links a series of plane commands together to construct a single rectangular tube.

Tube Fitting

The MEASURE TUBE FITTING command allows you to design a tube by measuring points in space to define the tube segments. A plane and cylinder at the ends of the tube is required. The plane and cylinder are used to determine the starting and ending points of the tube as well as the angle to the surface.

Construct TubeEnter XYZ

Round

The XYZ values of the breakpoints, tube diameter and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

Rectangular

The XYZ values of the breakpoints, tube width, tube height, and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

Enter PTB

Round

The Pull (y), Turn (B), Bend (C), tube diameter and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

Rectangular

The Pull (y), Turn (B), Bend (C), tube width, tube height, and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

216g

Page 237: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

From Features

A tube may be constructed from measured, constructed, or nominal geometry. Two planes, a series of cylinders, and torids are selected to construct a tube.

Breakpoints

The breakpoints of a constructed or nominal tube may be added as separate features for use in alignment, construction, or dimension commands.

Importing Data

Import CSV

Select a comma-delimited file that contains the XYZ or PTB information for a tube. This command will populate the list with the Pull, Turn, Bend, or XYZ value, bend radius and diameter information. The format for this command should be:

Tube diameter

01, X, Y, Z, 0, 0, 0, 0

02, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, Bend Radius

03, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, Bend Radius

##, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, 0

NOTE: If the CONSTRUCT > TUBE > ENTER XYZ is used, only the X, Y, Z and Bend Radius information is needed. The PTB fields may be left blank. The X, Y, Z fields are not required for the ENTER PTB command.

Import BendPro™

Select a tube from the BendPro™ database. This command will populate the list with the Pull, Turn, Bend, Bend Radius and diameter information that was used to create the tube.

From Polyline

Select a polyline from the CAD view and the XYZ breakpoint list will be populated with the vertices of the polyline.

217Chapter 24: Round Tubing

Page 238: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Round Tubin

Tube ReportingTube Correction Report

TubeBendCorrection is a report format specifically designed for calculating tube spring back. The Pull Turn Bend of the measured tube will be compared to the Pull Turn Bend of the nominal tube and a correction report will be generated. The correction report provides you with Pull Turn Bend information that will output a tube to match the nominal.

Important Topics - Round Tubing• The Tubing Preferences are based upon the settings of the tube

bending machine.

• The tubing bend radius may be measured for each bend or entered (default) for the tube. If a bend angle is 180 degrees, you must measure the bend as a torus.

• The tubing commands may be used in the Learn/Execute program to create part programs.

218g

Page 239: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Instructors Comments

Enter Comments Here

Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Practical Exercise1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

Measuring a Tube

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select TUBE > ROUND TUBE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will step you through the measurement of a tube by linking the plane and cylinder commands together.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 25-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 25-2 Load Tolerances

219Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Page 240: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 25: Measuring a

2 ❑ Measure End B of the tube as a plane.

3 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

4 ❑ Measure the first segment of the tube as a cylinder.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

• Take four or five points on the front of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 25-3 Measure Plane

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 25-4 Measure First Segment

220 Round Tube Practical

Page 241: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Measure the second segment of the tube as a cylinder.

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

8 ❑ Measure the third segment of the tube as a cylinder.

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 25-5 Measure Second Segment

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 25-6 Measure Third Segment

221Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Page 242: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 25: Measuring a

10 ❑ Measure the fourth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

12 ❑ Measure the fifth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 25-7 Measure Fourth Segment

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 25-8 Measure Fifth Segment

222 Round Tube Practical

Page 243: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

There are no more segments to measure, but CAM2 continues to prompt for a cylinder.

14 ❑ Press the BACK button to cancel the cylinder measurment.

15 ❑ Measure End A of the tube as a plane.

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

17 ❑ The Tube diameter and Bend Radius information is displayed.

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the tube.

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

• Press the <BACK> == NO button to confirm that there are no more segments to measure.

FIGURE 25-9 Last Segment?

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 25-10 Measure Plane

• Tube Diameter = 6.35.

• Bend Radius = Fixed 12.70.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 25-11 Tube Bend Information

223Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Page 244: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 25: Measuring a

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Tube Measure-ment.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 25-12 Enter Header Information

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF col-umn. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 25-13 Report List

224 Round Tube Practical

Page 245: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

9 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

10 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

• Filename = Tube Measurement.

• Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 25-14 Save Report

• File name = Tube Measurement.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 25-15 Save As

225Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Page 246: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 25: Measuring a

226

Round Tube Practical

Page 247: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Instructors Comments

Enter Comments Here

Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Practical ExercisePreparing the Learn Execute file

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

Start Programming

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 26-2 Load Tolerances

227Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 248: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Creating a R

2 ❑ Choose the file type that you are creating.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

3 ❑ You will see the LEARN/EXECUTE window. This shows you the instructions the program currently contains.

4 ❑ Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button at the top of the window. This will begin the On-Line Learn program.

Constructing a Nominal Tube

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT Menu, select TUBE > ENTER XYZ.

2 ❑ Enter the Tube type and Diameter.

• Select the ROUND toggle button.

• Diameter = 6.35.

• Select CAM2 Measure Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-3 Choose File type

FIGURE 26-4 Offline Programing Dialog

228ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 249: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Enter the first point.

4 ❑ Click the ADD button.

5 ❑ Enter the second point.

6 ❑ Click the ADD button.

• X = 0.0.

• Y = 0.0.

• Z = 0.0.

• Bend Radius = 0.0.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-5 Enter Breakpoint

• X =25.0.

• Y = 0.0.

• Z = 0.0.

• Bend Radius = 12.7.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-6 Enter Breakpoint

229Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 250: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Creating a R

7 ❑ Enter the third point.

8 ❑ Click the ADD button.

9 ❑ Enter the fourth point.

10 ❑ Click the ADD button.

• X = 100.0.

• Y = -27.5.

• Z = 12.0.

• Bend Radius = 12.7.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-7 Enter Breakpoint

• X = 100.0.

• Y = 282.5.

• Z = 12.0.

• Bend Radius = 12.7.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-8 Enter Breakpoint

230ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 251: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Enter the fifth point.

12 ❑ Click the ADD button.

13 ❑ Enter the last point.

14 ❑ Click the ADD button.

15 ❑ Select the NOMINAL radio button.

16 ❑ Click the OK button.

17 ❑ Click the OK button to accept the tube.

• X = 25.0.

• Y = 255.0.

• Z = 0.0.

• Bend Radius = 12.7.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-9 Enter Breakpoint

• X = 0.0.

• Y = 255.0.

• Z = 0.0.

• Bend Radius = 12.7.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-10 Enter Breakpoint

231Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 252: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Creating a R

Construct Tube Points

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select TUBE > BREAKPOINTS.

2 ❑ Click OK to the 6 points created dialog.

Measuring a Tube

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select TUBE > ROUND TUBE.

Notice how CAM2 Measure steps through the measurement of a tube by linking the plane and cylinder commands.

2 ❑ Measure End B of the tube as a plane.

3 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

• Tube = N_TUBE001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-11

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 26-12 Measure Plane

232ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 253: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Measure the first segment of the tube as a cylinder.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

6 ❑ Measure the second segment of the tube as a cylinder.

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the BACK button for compensa-tion.

FIGURE 26-13 Measure First Segment

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the BACK button for compensa-tion.

FIGURE 26-14 Measure Second Segment

233Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 254: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Creating a R

8 ❑ Measure the third segment of the tube as a cylinder.

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder results.

10 ❑ Measure the fourth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the BACK button for compensa-tion.

FIGURE 26-15 Measure Third Segment

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the BACK button for compensa-tion.

FIGURE 26-16 Measure Fourth Segment

234ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 255: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

12 ❑ Measure the fifth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

There are no more segments to measure, but CAM2 continues to prompt for a cylinder.

14 ❑ Press the Back button to tell CAM2 you are finished measuring.

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the BACK button for compensa-tion.

FIGURE 26-17 Measure Fifth Segment

• Press the <BACK> == NO button to confirm that there are no more seg-ments to measure.

FIGURE 26-18 Last Segment?

235Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 256: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Creating a R

15 ❑ Measure End A of the tube as a plane.

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

17 ❑ The Tube diameter and Bend Radius information is displayed.

18 ❑ Select the NOMINALS tab.

19 ❑ Press the OK button to accept the tube.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 26-19 Measure Plane

• Tube Diameter = 6.35.

• Bend Radius = Fixed 12.70.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-20 Tube Bend Information

• Select Nominal = N_TUBE001.

FIGURE 26-21 Tube Results

236ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 257: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Tube Alignment

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select FEATURE.

2 ❑ Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP1.

3 ❑ Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP2.

• Primary Point = C_TUBE001-BP1.

• Secondary Point = C_TUBE001-BP2.

• Tertiary Point = C_TUBE001-BP6.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-22 Feature Alignment

• Select Nominal = N_TUBE001-BP1.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-23 Nominal Breakpoint

• Select Nominal = N_TUBE001-BP2.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-24 Nominal Breakpoint

237Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 258: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Creating a R

4 ❑ Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP6.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

Printing a Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION:

• Select Nominal = N_TUBE001-BP6.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-25 Nominal Breakpoint

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Tube Program.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-26 Enter Header Information

238ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 259: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF col-umn. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-27 Report List

• Filename = Tube Program.

• Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 26-28 Save Report

239Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 260: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Creating a R

End Learn.

1 ❑ Click the STOP ONLINE LEARN button.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

FIGURE 26-29 Offline Learn/Execute

• Creator = your name.

• Part Name = Tube Program.

• Drawing Revision Number = A.

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 26-30 Saving the Learn/Execute

240ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 261: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

241Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 262: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 263: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Instructors Comments

Enter Comments Here

Chapter 27: Tool Building• Objective - The instructor will introduce techniques that

may be used to position parts into an assembly. Upon completion of this section, the student will be able to position parts using the DRO Window.

Tool BuildingThis section deals with building an assembly with known data. These techniques are used to find the high or low surface or out of round locations for a circle, cylinder or sphere.

DRO Window

The DRO window may be assigned to a measured, constructed, or nominal feature. The DRO window will display the deviation between the probe to the selected feature. The deviation color is based upon the feature tolerance

(nominal tolerances will be based upon the feature default). A green value is in tolerance. A yellow value is in tolerance, but above 75% of the tolerance value. A red value is out of tolerance. The DRO Window on a feature will be compensated for the probe. The DRO Window command is found in Review Features. The window may be modified by clicking on the Windows icon and selecting Configure.

Dynamic DRO Window

The Dynamic DRO Window will automatically switch between point and surface features. The DRO window may be modified for Points or Surfaces by clicking on the Windows icon and selecting Configure.

Important Topics - Tool Building• DRO Windows may be created to show the deviation of the

measurement device to the feature.

• The Dynamic DRO Window may be used on points and surfaces.

• Nominal Features will use the default part tolerance to display the green (in tolerance), yellow (tolerance warning) or red (out of tolerance) deviation colors.

243Chapter 27: Tool Building

Page 264: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 265: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Instructors Comments

Enter Comments Here

Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical

Practical Exercise1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 28-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 28-2 Load Tolerances

FIGURE 28-3 FARO CAD Translator

245Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical

Page 266: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 28-4 Adding CAD Parts

FIGURE 28-3 FARO CAD Translator

246 Practical

Page 267: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

Aligning to the CAD

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere A.

FIGURE 28-5 FARO_Demo_part1.igs

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face of the sphere and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-6 Measure Sphere A

247Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical

Page 268: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

5 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• Label = SPHERE_A.

FIGURE 28-7 Sphere Results

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 28-8 Results Nominal Tab

• X= -135.0, Y = -50.0, Z = 28.5, Diam-eter = 12.0.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 28-9 Construct Sphere Enter Values

248 Practical

Page 269: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the sphere.

7 ❑ Measure Sphere B.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

9 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face of the sphere and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-10 Measure Sphere B

• Label = SPHERE_B.

FIGURE 28-11 Sphere Results

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 28-12 Results Nominal Tab

249Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical

Page 270: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building

10 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the sphere.

12 ❑ Measure Sphere C.

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• X= 135.0, Y = -50.0, Z = 28.5, Diame-ter = 12.0.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 28-13 Construct Sphere Enter Values

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face of the sphere and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-14 Measure Sphere C

• Label = SPHERE_C.

FIGURE 28-15 Sphere Results

250 Practical

Page 271: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

14 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

15 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the sphere.

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 28-16 Results Nominal Tab

• X= -135.0, Y = 50.0, Z = 28.5, Diame-ter = 12.00.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 28-17 Construct Sphere Enter Values

251Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical

Page 272: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building

Iterative Alignment

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

2 ❑ The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command will stop. The calculations may not be seen since the calculation should solve very quickly.

3 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

• Selected Choices = M_SPHERE_A, M_SPHERE_B, M_SPHERE_C.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 28-18 Iterative Alignment

• Take a look at the MAX ERROR of the Iterative Alignment. For this part the value should be in toler-ance.

• Notice the error between each of the measured spheres and its associated nominal.

FIGURE 28-19 Iterative Alignment Results

252 Practical

Page 273: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

Import Model

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

• File name = Tool Building.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 28-20 Save As

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = Bracket3.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 28-21 FARO CAD Translator

253Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical

Page 274: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = Bracket3.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 28-22 Adding CAD Parts

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 28-23 Construct Circle

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 28-24 Circle Results

254 Practical

Page 275: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < MOVE IJK.

NOTE: The DISTANCE value is based upon the location of the center of

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 28-25 Construct Circle

• Label = CIRCLE002.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 28-26 Circle Results

• Select a Line = N_CIRCLE001.

• Distance = 2.6.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 28-27 Move IJK

255Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical

Page 276: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building

the probe from the center of the circle.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

9 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < MOVE IJK.

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT001.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 28-28 Point Results

• Select a Line = N_CIRCLE002.

• Distance = 2.6.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 28-29 Move IJK

• Label = POINT002.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 28-30 Point Results

256 Practical

Page 277: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Creating a DRO window on a Nominal

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Add a DRO window for point 1.

3 ❑ Add a DRO window for point 2.

4 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

5 ❑ Reposition the DRO Windows so both can be seen easily.

Positioning the Bracket

1 ❑ Place the bracket on the surface plate so that the back of the plate faces towards cylinder G.

2 ❑ Insert the two screws, but do not tighten.

• Click on N_POINT001.

• Click the DRO button.

FIGURE 28-31 Adding a DRO

• Click on N_POINT002.

• Click the DRO button.

FIGURE 28-32 Adding a DRO

FIGURE 28-33 DRO Windows

257Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical

Page 278: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building

3 ❑ Place the probe in the hole of circle 1.

4 ❑ Move the plate slowly until all the XYZ values in the POINT 1 DRO are green.

5 ❑ Tighten the screw closest to circle 1.

6 ❑ Place the probe in the hole of circle 2.

7 ❑ Move the plate slowly until all the XYZ values in the POINT 2 DRO are green.

8 ❑ Verify that point 1 is still green by placing the probe in the hole of circle 1.

9 ❑ Once both points read green, tighten both screws.

Recording the Tool Position

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < COMP OFF.

2 ❑ Measure Point 1.

• Place the probe in the hole of circle 1. Press the FRONT button.

• Press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-34 Measure Point

258 Practical

Page 279: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

5 ❑ Measure Point 2.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT001.

FIGURE 28-35 Point Results

• Place the probe in the hole of circle 2. Press the FRONT button.

• press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-36 Measure Point

• Label = POINT002.

FIGURE 28-37 Point Results

259Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical

Page 280: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

8 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

10 ❑ Repeat the command and measure more surface points.

• Move the probe close to the part; the nearest sur-face will turn red.

• Press the FRONT button.

• Pull the probe away from the surface, press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-38 Measuring a Inspect Surface Point

• The results displayed are the X,Y, Z, and the 3D deviation to the surface.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 28-39 Inspect Surface Point Results

260 Practical

Page 281: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

261Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions

Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions• OBJECTIVE: Understand how to apply GD&T (Geometric

Dimensioning and Tolerancing) to CAM2 features. After completing this section the student will be able to apply GD&T to part inspection.

Geometric Characteristics and Symbols

Form DimensionsForm dimensions are the simplest of the GD&T because the measurement is compared to 0.0 or perfect geometry. The Datum is the feature itself. CAM2 Measure X creates a form feature that uses the measured data from a plane, line, circle, or cylinder to calculate the out of tolerance value.

FLATNESS

STRAIGHTNESS

CIRCULARITY (ROUNDNESS)

CYLINDRICITY

PERPENDICULARITY

ANGULARITY

PARALLELISM

POSITION

CONCENTRICITY

M MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION (MMC)

S REGARDLESS OF FEATURE SIZE (RFS)

ØDIAMETRICAL (CYLINDRICAL) TOLERANCE ZONEOR FEATURE

8.00 BASIC, OR EXACT, DIMENSION

A DATUM FEATURE SYMBOL

C1Ø.250 DATUM TARGET

Ø .020 A B C FEATURE CONTROL FRAME

Page 282: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

262Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions

Orientation DimensionsOrientation dimensions define the gap or interference created when two surfaces are put together. These dimensions are only a little more complicated because they require a feature and a datum. The datum is considered infinite and the value of the orientation dimension is over the length of the

feature, or an entered value.

Parallelism

When two parallel planes come together, they are supposed to mate flush. If they are not parallel, when they come together, a gap is created. Parallelism is the gap. Parallelism can be used with any plane or

line reducible feature.

Perpendicularity

Perpendicularity is intended to show the gap created by the features at a right angle to the datum.

Perpendicularity can be used with any plane or

line reducible feature.

Concentricity

This tells if a line reducible feature is on the same center-line as the datum. This is intended to see if a pin and a hole will mate without interference. If the pin is not concentric to a hole (i.e., the pin is angled too drastically) then the pin will interfere with the

edges of the hole.

True Position DimensionsTrue Position is a fairly simple concept. The feature control frame appears to be complicated, but it’s not. Align to Datums using a coordinate system with a CAD = PART alignment and check the position.

Associate the proper nominal in the RESULTS dialog box. In the

tolerances tab turn on MMC or RFS depending on which one is indicated. Change the RFS or MMC tolerance to the value indicated in the control frame.

Parallelism

Feature

Datum

Perpendicularity

Datum

Feature

x 2 = Concentricity

Feature

Datum

Page 283: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

263Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions

Multiple datum schemes require multiple alignments.

RFS (Regardless of Feature Size)

This condition of True Position tolerance is the tolerance specified for the position of a feature - Regardless of the Feature Size. The size is generally the diameter of a circle.

Since this is a 2D value, the nominal point is projected to the measured plane of the circle before the distance is calculated. The 2D distance between the center of the Nominal Circle to the Measured Circle times two (2) is the RFS and MMC.

MMC (Maximum Material Condition)

Another condition of True Position tolerance is the tolerance specified for the position of a feature using the Maximum Material Condition. The positional tolerance changes according to the measured size of the feature.

For a hole, the diameter at the lower end of the tolerance band (as small as it should get) is the value used for MMC calculation. For a pin, the diameter at the upper end of the tolerance band (as big as it should get) is the value used for MMC calculation. If the size of the feature is not at the maximum material condition, the difference between the actual size and the maximum material condition is added as a bonus to the positional tolerance.

• As the hole gets bigger, the positional tolerance increases. This means that even if the center of the hole is out of tolerance, a pin inserted in the hole would have some room to fit.

• As the pin gets smaller, the positional tolerance increases. This means that even if the center of the pin is out of tolerance, the pin would fit into the hole.

Tol.

Zone

½ RFS or MMC

Nom

inal

Measured

Bonus Tol.

NOMINAL

Outer Tolerance

Inner Tolerance

Tol. Zone

ACTUAL

Page 284: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

264Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions

For example:

The MMC tolerance on a hole is 0.50, the nominal diameter is 20.0 ± 0.10. If the hole is at its smallest (Maximum Material Condition), the stated MMC tolerance applies. The larger the hole, the more tolerance is allowed until the upper tolerance limit of the hole is reached (Least Material Condition).

If MMC is not specified, RFS is implied.

RFS and MMC are set in the TOLERANCE tab for the feature. Access the TOLERANCE tab of a feature through the RESULTS or REVIEW FEATURES dialog box.

Important Topics - Advanced Dimensions• If MMC is not specified on the print, RFS tolerance can be assumed.

• When measuring to true position tolerances, the alignment in CAM2 Measure X must be based on the drawing datums.

• The CAM2 Measure X software stores the tolerance information with each feature individually. All the control frame information (diameter, tolerances, true position information, roundness, etc.) is assigned to the feature.

Diameter: 20.0 ± 0.10MMC Tolerance: 0.50

Feature Size Positional Tolerance19.90 0.50 This is MMC19.95 0.5520.00 0.6020.05 0.6520.10 0.70 This is LMC

Page 285: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

265Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Practical ExerciseUse a drawing and a CAD file for nominal information. Construct nominal features from the CAD model, construct a nominal coordinate system, measure alignment features and construct a measured coordinate system, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, create advance dimensions, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Check the part following the dimensions on this drawing. Start by locating the Datum Feature Symbols.

FIGURE 30-1 FARO Demonstration Part

B

B

3 12

A

B

1

C

D

03FRM049-REV 1

B

5 4

5 4 3 2

A

C

D

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWINGIS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TITLE

Armed with Quality

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

FINSH REQUIRED63

15[.591]

[1.181]30

15[.591]

15[.591]

8X 20 [0.798]EQ. SP. ON A

140 [5.512] BC

25[.984]

+0.25-0.10

Ø 1.0 M A B C

A.50

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

25[.984]

100[3.94]

15[.591]

65[2.559]

170[6.693]

4X 5[.197]

50[1.969]

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

C60[2.362]

.50 A

.50

15°

160[6.299]

15[.591]

25[.984]

255[10.04]

20[.787]

40[1.575]

150[5.906]C

265[10.433]

300[11.811]

240[9.449]

65[2.559]

130[5.118]

167[6.575]

15[.591]

15[.591]

50[1.969]

20[.787] 20

[.787]

50[1.969]

65[2.56]

B.50 .50 B

20[.787]

SECTION B-B

Page 286: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

266Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 30-3 Load Tolerances

Page 287: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

267Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 30-4 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 30-5 Adding CAD Parts

Page 288: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

268Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

Constructing Nominals

In this exercise, we will introduce the method for creating a Nominal Coordinate system. If the imported CAD file contains a coordinate system that is located off the part, it is usually difficult to create a measured coordinate system to match it. If that is the case, a nominal coordinate system may be created on the CAD model using the CAD features. Next, those features of the part will be measured, and a measured coordinate system will be constructed. For a proper alignment, the Nominal Coordinate system created will then be associated to the Constructed Coordinate System using the CAD=PART alignment command.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < NOMINAL.

FIGURE 30-6 FARO_Demo_Part3 CAD file

• CAM2 Measure X will create a plane with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the edge of the top surface. Watch the OUTPUT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 30-7 Construct XY Plane

Page 289: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

269Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

2 ❑ Choose the direction of the plane.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

NOTE: Since a nominal line was selected only one point is required to define the line.

• Click the LEFT mouse button to switch the vector so that it points up.

• Click the RIGHT mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 30-8 Choose Direction Vector

• Label = PLANE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 30-9 Nominal Plane Results

• CAM2 Measure X will create a line with 2 points.

• Use the mouse to click a point on the edge of the top surface. Watch the OUTPUT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 30-10 Construct X Axis

Page 290: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

270Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

NOTE: Since a nominal circle was selected only one point is required to define the circle.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 30-11 Nominal Line Results

• CAM2 Measure X will create a circle with 3 points.

• Left mouse click a point on the edge of the top surface. Watch the OUTPUT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 30-12 Construct Circle 9

• Label = CIRCLE_9.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 30-13 Circle Results

Page 291: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

271Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Creating a Nominal Alignment

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

Measure the Datum Features

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Select a Plane = N_PLANE001.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = N_LINE001.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = N_CIRCLE_9.

• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-14 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 30-15 Measure XY Plane

Page 292: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

272Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

6 ❑ Measure Datum B as a line.

• Label = DATUM_A.

• Datum = A.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 30-16 Plane Results

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-17 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 30-18 Measure X Axis

Page 293: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

273Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels.

8 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CYLINDER.

9 ❑ Measure Datum C as a cylinder.

• Label = DATUM_B.

• Datum = B.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 30-19 Line Results

• Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the cylinder and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 30-20 Measure Cylinder 9

Page 294: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

274Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Constructing the Measured Alignment

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT > LINE/FEATURE.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

• Label = DATUM_C.

• Datum = C.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 30-21 Cylinder Results

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.

• Select a Line = M_DATUM_C.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-22 Construct Point Line/Feature

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = C_POINT001.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-23 3-2-1 Coordinate System

Page 295: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

275Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system results.

5 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment results.

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = N_COORDSYS001.

• Scale Option = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-24 CAD=Part Alignment

FIGURE 30-25 Aligned to CAD

Page 296: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

276Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Form Dimensions

With an alignment between the measured features and nominal features continue with the GD&T form dimensions.

1 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select FLATNESS.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the flatness.

3 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select STRAIGHTNESS.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the straightness.

5 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select PERPENDICULARITY.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the perpendicularity.

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-26 Flatness

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_B.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-27 Straightness

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Datum = A.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_C.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-28 Perpendicularity

Page 297: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

277Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Dimension the concentricity between two bores on the plate. The second bore has not been measured; however, it is possible to measure inside a GD&T command.

7 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select CONCENTRICITY.

8 ❑ Measure the cylinder 10.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the concentricity.

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Datum = C.

• Select a Feature = Measure as Cylinder.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-29 Concentricity

• Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the cylinder and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 30-30 Measure Cylinder10

• Label = CYLINDER010.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 30-31 Cylinder Results

Page 298: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

278Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Position Dimensions

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

3 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

A nominal circle from the CAD model is automatically associated to the measured circle because it is near the measured circle.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-32 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 30-33 Measure Circle 1

Page 299: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

279Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

4 ❑ Click the TOLERANCES tab.

5 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This updates the circle tolerances for this file, and all the future circles will have these tolerance values.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

7 ❑ Measure will continue to measue circles until the command is canceled.

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

• X = unchecked.

• Y = unchecked.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = checked, Upper Tol = 1.0.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 30-34 Set Tolerances

• Continue measuring all eight circles in the pattern (2-8).

FIGURE 30-35 Measure Circles 2 -8

Page 300: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

280Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Advanced Dimensioning.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-36 Enter Header Information

Page 301: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

281Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

• Header = Header

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-37 Report List

• Filename = Advanced Dimensioning.

• Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 30-38 Save Report

Page 302: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

282Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Save The Measurements

9 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

10 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Advanced Dimensioning.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 30-39 Save As

Page 303: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

283Chapter 31: Introduction to Scanning

Chapter 31: Introduction to Scanning

• Objective - The instructor will present how the scanning functions of CAM2 Measure X can be used to obtain geometric and non-geometric curves. After this section, the student will be able to collect data for use in CAM2 Measure X and other CAD systems.

What is Scanning?

Scanning data can be saved as points, polylines, or splines. Data will typically

be saved as polylines, which are easier to work with than points or splines.

Scanned data is always uncompensated, which means the data is always taken at the center of the probe. To compensate for the probe radius, create a surface and then offset that surface by the radius.

Why Scan?Scanning is generally useful if the part is not comprised of basic geometric (or prismatic) features. The general intent behind scanning is to generate curves that will eventually be used to create surfaces.

Scanning OptionsThe scanning option used depends upon the shape of the part being measured. Certain geometric shapes lend themselves to parallel cross sections; others lend themselves more to radial or normal lock planes.

FIGURE 31-1 Scanning Techniques

Parallel Cylindrical Normal

Instructors Comments

Enter Comments Here

Page 304: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

284Chapter 31: Introduction to Scanning

Freehand Scan

Use the Freehand scan to trace a profile. CAM2 Measure X allows you to set

the minimum distance between the points. As the probe passes through the minimum distance, it grabs the next point.

Lock Planes

The Lock Plane options is used to sort data onto predefined cross sections. CAM2 Measure X allows Locked Planes that are parallel to a plane, radial about a specified axis, or normal to a polyline.

• Parallel Lock Planes: Select the plane from which the cross sections are parallel, the number of planes (from 1 to 1000), the distance between the planes, and the minimum distance between any two points on one cross section. If the points are closer than the minimum distance, CAM2 Measure X will drop points until the minimum distance is achieved.

• Radial Lock Planes: Select a line from which the cross section planes will emanate, the number of planes (from 1 to 1000), and the minimum distance between any two points on one cross section. If the points are closer than the minimum distance, CAM2 Measure X will drop points until the minimum distance is achieved.

• Normal Lock Planes: Select a polyline. The planes are automatically generated at the points along the polyline.

Editing Scan data

Editing the scan data is a little different than editing 2D and 3D features. Since scan data is not a feature, you can not use the EDIT button in the REVIEW FEATURES command. CAM2 Measure X has specific ADD and REMOVE POINTS commands for data created with the commands in the SCAN menu.

Use the EDIT < DELETE command to completely remove scan data.

Important Topics - Introduction to Scanning• To use the Normal Locked Plane command, a polyline must be

selected. The polyline is typically created using the Freehand Scan.

• The Add or Remove Points command works with Polylines. The commands do not work with data saved as points or splines.

• Use the Edit > Delete command to delete points, polylines or splines.

Page 305: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

285Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Practical ExerciseUsing the assembled demo part, align to the part, and practice the scanning skills. Work in either inches or millimeters.

NOTE: The steps in this practical are written to use Millimeters as the Drawing Unit. If you wish to complete the practical in Inches, remember to convert any number that you are typing into a dialog box.

Set the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of the plate will be the XY plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-axis and origin, respectively.

FIGURE 32-1 FARO Demonstration Bracket

S1

S2

Page 306: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

286Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

Measuring and Creating an Alignment

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 32-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 32-3 Load Tolerances

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 32-4 Measure XY Plane

Page 307: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

287Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

6 ❑ Measure the line.

• Label = PLANE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 32-5 Plane Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 32-6 Select Plane

• Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 32-7 Measure Line 1

S1

S2

Page 308: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

288Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

8 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 32-8 Line Results

• Take the three or four points on the S1 edge by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 32-9 Measure Line 2

• Label = LINE002.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 32-10 Line Results

S1

S2

Page 309: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

289Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Now that you have enough features to define a coordinate system, construct a Line/Line Intersection coordinate system.

10 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

CAD=Part

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.

• Select a Line = M_LINE002.

• Click the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK to create the coordinate system.

FIGURE 32-11 Line/Line coordinate system

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK to create the Alignment.

FIGURE 32-12 CAD=Part Alignment

Page 310: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

290Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Save the Measurements

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

Scan Measurement Preference

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ Select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

3 ❑ Click OK.

• The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Scanning.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 32-13 Save As

• Type of Scanning = Start/Pause Scan With Trigger.

• Maximum Distance = 100000000000.

• Minimum Distance = 2.0.

FIGURE 32-14 Feature Scanning

Page 311: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

291Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Freehand Scanning (2D)

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN > FREEHAND.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

NOTE: The offset of 30 mm will create a plane parallel to the YZ plane at X = 30 mm. This will be at the edge of the curved surface.

3 ❑ Place the probe on the upper part of the surface.

• Type = 2D Freehand.

• Chordal = unchecked.

• Minimum Distance = 2.0.

• Save As = Open Polylines.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 32-15 Freehand Scan

• Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 30.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 32-16 Select Plane

• Press theFRONT button to begin scanning.

• Move the probe across the surface contour.

• Press the FRONT button to pause the scan.

• Press the BACK button to end the scan.

FIGURE 32-17 Measure the freehand scan

S1

S2

Page 312: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

292Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

4 ❑ Save the scan data.

Parallel Lock Planes

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN < PARALLEL LOCK PLANES.

• To keep the scan data, press the FRONT button.

• To discard the scan data, press the BACK button.

FIGURE 32-18 Keep Data?

FIGURE 32-19 Freehand Scan

• Increment = 10.0 (0.50 in).

• Number of Planes = 100.

• Minimum Distance = 0.5 (0.05 in).

• Save As = Open Polylines.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 32-20 Parallel Lock Plane Scan

Page 313: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

293Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

3 ❑ Scan the surface.

4 ❑ Save the scan data.

• Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 32-21 Select Plane

• Press the FRONT button to begin scanning.

• Move the probe across the surface contour.

• Press the FRONT button to pause the scan.

• Press the BACK button to end the scan.

FIGURE 32-22 Parallel Locked Scanning

• To keep the scan data, press the FRONT button.

• To discard the scan data, press the BACK button.

FIGURE 32-23 Keep Data?

S1

S2

Page 314: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

294Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical

FIGURE 32-24 Parallel Locked Planes

Page 315: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

295Chapter 33: Measurement Automation

Chapter 33: Measurement Automation

• Objective: The instructor will present how to use the Learn/Execute modes of CAM2 Measure X to increase the inspection process of repeat part inspection. After completing this section, the student will be able to create Learn/Execute programs to automate steps of the measurement process.

Learn Mode

The LEARN mode creates measurement routines or part programs to

automate a measurement process.

The LEARN mode stores measurements, constructions, dimensions,

coordinate systems, measurement instructions, and target points.

The output of text and graphical reports can also be learned. Programs created in the LEARN mode can be run in EXECUTE mode.

There are two ways to create a Learn file: On-Line (with the measurement

device connected) and Off-Line (with no measurement device connected).

Create Learn files for operators that may not be very familiar with CAM2 Measure X or the part. Adding measurement instructions to the Learn file allows the operators to read instructions before they measure each feature.

On-Line Learn

On-Line Learn is like a video camera recording all of the activities. Once a feature is measured, add measurement instructions, nominals, tolerances, etc. in the RESULTS dialog box.

Page 316: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

296Chapter 33: Measurement Automation

Off-Line Learn

Off-Line Learn creates a program by selecting features from the available menus for storage in the Learn file. A measurement device does not need to be connected; the only requirement is nominal information.

Off-Line Learn is useful for creating measurement routines when the part is not available because the part does not need to be measured to make the program.

The Off-Line mode can also be used to edit the programs.

Execute ModeThe EXECUTE mode allows the operator (or end user) to run the preprogrammed routines created in LEARN mode. If operators are only going to run EXECUTE mode, they only require minimal training.

Important Topics - Measurement Automation

• There are two ways to create Learn Files: On-Line or Off-line.

• Every Learn command has a Comment parameter which stores the measurement instructions for the operator (or end user).

Page 317: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

297Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Practical ExerciseCreate a part program, on-line, using CAD data for nominals. Use a CAD file for nominal information, measure alignment features, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, construct non-measurable features, add dimensions, create and save an inspection report, save the Learn file, and run the Learn file to measure the part.

Translating and Adding CAD

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 34-2 Load Tolerances

Page 318: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

298Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 34-3 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 34-4 Adding CAD Parts

Page 319: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

299Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

Start Learning

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

FIGURE 34-5 FARO_Demo_Part4 CAD file

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-6 Choose File type

Page 320: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

300Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

4 ❑ The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears. This shows instructions the program currently contains.

5 ❑ Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button at the top of the window. This will begin the On-Line Learn programing.

6 ❑ CAM2 Measure X will switch back to the graphics view. The Learn

toolbar automatically appears on the screen. It has with three buttons: LEARN VIEW, SAVE LEARN, and STOP ON-LINE LEARN.

FIGURE 34-7 Off-Line Programing Dialog

• LEARN VIEW records the current view in the program.

• SAVE LEARN opens the SAVE LEARN dialog box.

• STOP ON-LINE LEARN returns CAM2 Measure X to the LEARN/EXECUTE window. This allows you to save the program, make off-line changes, end the Learn Process, or resume On-Line Learning.

FIGURE 34-8 Learn Toolbar

Page 321: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

301Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Measure Alignment/Datum Features

Measure 4 circles in the bolt pattern for an Iterative/Best Fit Alignment. Measure the circles at the 12, 3, 6 & 9 o'clock positions (Circles 1,3,5,7) around the bolt pattern.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure a plane on the top surface of the part.

• Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 34-9 Measure XY Plane

Page 322: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

302Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

3 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

4 ❑ Enter some measurement instructions for the operator.

• Feature Notes: Use this to enter information about a feature for the Report.

NOTE: The Learn file will not store this information.

• Measurement Instructions: Use this to give instructions, or comments, to the operator as the Learn program is Executed.

• Highlight: This will highlight the selected nominal red when the Learn program is Executed.

FIGURE 34-10 Plane Results

FIGURE 34-11 Enter Measurement Instructions for the Operator

Page 323: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

303Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

5 ❑ Click the HIGHLIGHT button.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

8 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

9 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Click the FROM SCREEN button.

• Select the CAD surface that is to be measured.

• Click OK to accept the results of the nominal surface.

• Right mouse click to return to the Highlight dialog box.

• Click OK to accept the highlight.

FIGURE 34-12 Highlight the CAD Surface

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-13 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 34-14 Measure Circle 1

Page 324: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

304Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

11 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

• Label = CIRCLE001_I.

FIGURE 34-15 Circle Results

• Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 1.

FIGURE 34-16 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 1

Page 325: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

305Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

12 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

13 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

14 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

15 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button.

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

NOTE: Remember that CAM2 Measure X will continue to measure circles until the command is canceled.

• Using the left mouse button select Circle 1 on the CAD Model.

• Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 34-17 Circle 1

• X = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Y = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 34-18 Set Tolerances

Page 326: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

306Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

17 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

18 ❑ Take a look at the results.

19 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 34-19 Measure Circle 3

• Label = CIRCLE003_I.

FIGURE 34-20 Circle Results

• Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 3.

FIGURE 34-21 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 3

Page 327: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

307Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

20 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

21 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

22 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

23 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

24 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Using the left mouse button select Circle 3 on the CAD Model.

• Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 34-22 Circle 3

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 34-23 Measure Circle 5

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.

FIGURE 34-24 Circle Results

Page 328: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

308Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

25 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

26 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

27 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

28 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

29 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 5.

FIGURE 34-25 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 5

• Using the left mouse button select Circle 5 on the CAD Model.

• Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 34-26 Circle 5

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 34-27 Measure Circle 7

Page 329: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

309Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

30 ❑ Take a look at the results.

31 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

32 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

33 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

34 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

• Label = CIRCLE007_I.

FIGURE 34-28 Circle Results

• Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 7.

FIGURE 34-29 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 7

• Using the left mouse button select Circle 7 on the CAD Model.

• Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 34-30 Circle 7

Page 330: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

310Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Creating an Alignment

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept alignment.

Constructions and Dimensions

Construct the Bolt Circle and check it to the CAD Model.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I, M_CIRCLE007_I.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = NONE.

• Click OK to create the Alignment.

FIGURE 34-31 Iterative Alignment

• Selected Choices = N_CIRCLE001, N_CIRCLE003, N_CIRCLE005, N_CIRCLE007.

• Select a Plane = N_CIRCLE001.

• Select NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-32 Construct Nominal Circle

Page 331: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

311Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

The nominal Bolt Circle has been constructed from the CAD circles. This will be the nominal for the part's Bolt Circle.

NOTE: Remember that Alignments, Constructions, and Dimensions automatically solve in Execute without any operator action. So, adding Comments, or Measurement Instructions, is generally not done for these feature types.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 34-33 Circle Results

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I, M_CIRCLE007_I.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-34 Construct Best Fit Circle

Page 332: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

312Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINAL tab.

Since this is a construction, in Execute CAM2 Measure X will complete this command automatically. No measurement instructions are required.

Check the angle of the circles in the pattern. They should be an evenly spaced 90° pattern around the center circle.

5 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE > APEX.

6 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

7 ❑ Click the KEY-IN button:

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the dimension.

• Select Nominal = N_BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 34-35 Bolt Circle Results

• Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003_I.

• Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001_I.

• Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-36 Dimension Angle Apex

• Angle = 90.

• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-37 Dimension Angle Nominal

Page 333: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

313Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Generating a Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Online Learn Execute.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-38 Enter Header Information

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-39 Report List

Page 334: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

314Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

End Learn.

1 ❑ Click the STOP ON-LINE LEARN button. The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears and the on-line programming stops.

• Filename = Online Learn Execute.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 34-40 Save Report

FIGURE 34-41 Off-Line Learn/Execute

Page 335: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

315Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

Execute Mode

Run the program.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Creator = your name.

• Part Name = Online Learn Execute.

• Drawing Revision Number = A.

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 34-42 Saving the Learn/Execute

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-43 Choose File type

Page 336: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

316Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

4 ❑ The LEARN/EXECUTE window shows the list of programs.

5 ❑ Run through the measurements.

6 ❑ Constructions and Dimensions are executed automatically.

7 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

8 ❑ Repeat Execute?

• Select ONLINE LEARN EXECUTE.

• Click the EXECUTE button.

FIGURE 34-44 Execute Only

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Online Learn Execute.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0002.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-45 Enter Header Information

• Press the BACK button to exit

FIGURE 34-46 Repeat the Program?

Page 337: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

317Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Practical ExerciseCreate a part program, off-line, using a drawing for nominals. Measure alignment features, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, construct non-measurable features, add dimensions, create and save an inspection report, save the learn file, and run the learn file to measure the part.

Translating and Adding CAD

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 35-2 Load Tolerances

Page 338: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

318Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Start Learning

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

4 ❑ The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears. This shows instructions the program currently contains.

Add Alignment/Datum Features

Construct a coordinate system based upon the datums, then measure the circles at 12, 3, 6 & 9 o'clock positions (Circles 1,3,5,7) around the bolt pattern.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Click on the MEASURE PLANE command (line 8).

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-3 Choose File type

FIGURE 35-4 Off-Line Programing Dialog

Page 339: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

319Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

3 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

4 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

5 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 9). All new commands are always added above the selected line.

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE > 2D LINE.

7 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

8 ❑ Click on the MEASURE LINE 2D command (line 9).

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure a plane. NOTE: This is the same as adding Measurement Instructions in On-Line learn.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 35-5 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-6 Change number of points for the feature

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-7 Select Plane

Page 340: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

320Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

9 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

10 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

11 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 10).

12 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

13 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

14 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 10).

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure a line.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 35-8 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-9 Change number of points for the feature

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-10 Select Plane

Page 341: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

321Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

15 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

16 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

17 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = CIRCLE009.

18 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

19 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure a circle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 35-11 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-12 Change number of points for the feature

Page 342: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

322Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

20 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 9.

21 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

22 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES button.

23 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button.

24 ❑ Click OK to accept the tolerances.

• X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 100.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-13 Construct Circle Enter Values

• X= unchecked.

• Y = unchecked.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked 0.25, -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 35-14 Results Tolerance Tab

Page 343: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

323Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Adding an Alignment

1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 12).

2 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM > 3-2-1.

3 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_LINE001.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = M_CIRCLE009.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-15 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-16 CAD=Part Alignment

Page 344: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

324Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Measuring Features

1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 14).

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

3 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

4 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 14).

5 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

6 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-17 Select Plane

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 35-18 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-19 Change number of points for the feature

Page 345: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

325Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

7 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = CIRCLE001.

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

9 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

10 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 1.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-20 Construct Circle Enter Values

Page 346: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

326Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

12 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES button.

13 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button.

14 ❑ Click OK to accept the tolerances.

15 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 16).

16 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

17 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

18 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 16).

• X= unchecked.

• Y = unchecked.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = checked, Upper Tol = 1.00.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 35-21 Results Tolerance Tab

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-22 Select Plane

Page 347: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

327Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

19 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

20 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

21 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = CIRCLE003.

22 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

23 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 35-23 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-24 Change number of points for the feature

Page 348: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

328Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

24 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 3.

25 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

26 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 18).

27 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

28 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

29 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 18).

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-25 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-26 Select Plane

Page 349: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

329Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

30 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

31 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

32 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = CIRCLE005.

33 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

34 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 35-27 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-28 Change number of points for the feature

Page 350: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

330Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

35 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 5.

36 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

37 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 20).

38 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

39 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

40 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 20).

• X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-29 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-30 Select Plane

Page 351: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

331Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

41 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

42 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

43 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = CIRCLE007.

44 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

45 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 35-31 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-32 Change number of points for the feature

Page 352: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

332Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

46 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 7.

47 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

Adding Constructions and Dimensions

1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 22).

2 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

3 ❑ Click on the CONSTRUCT CIRCLE BEST FIT command (line 22).

NOTE: Remember that Alignments, Constructions, and Dimensions automatically solve in Execute without any operator action. So, adding Comments, or Measurement Instructions, is generally not done for these feature types.

• X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-33 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001, M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE005, M_CIRCLE007.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-34 Construct Best Fit Circle

Page 353: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

333Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

4 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.

5 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

6 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

7 ❑ Enter the Nominal information for the bolt circle.

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

9 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES button.

• X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 140.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-35 Construct Circle Enter Values

• X= checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Y = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 35-36 Results Tolerance Tab

Page 354: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

334Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the tolerances.

11 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 24).

12 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE > APEX.

13 ❑ Click on the DIMENSION ANGLE APEX command (line 24).

14 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

15 ❑ Click the KEY-IN button.

16 ❑ Enter the following value:

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the dimension.

Generating a Report

1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 26).

2 ❑ From the MISC menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS > TEXT REPORT.

• Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003.

• Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001.

• Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-37 Dimension Angle Apex

• Angle = 90.

• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-38 Dimension Angle Nominal

Page 355: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

335Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

3 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

4 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

5 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

6 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-39 Report List

• Filename = Offline Learn Execute.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 35-40 Save Report

Page 356: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

336Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

End Learn

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

FIGURE 35-41 Off-Line Learn/Execute

• Creator = your name.

• Part Name = Offline Learn Execute.

• Drawing Revision Number = A.

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 35-42 Saving the Learn/Execute

Page 357: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

337Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Execute Mode

Run the program.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

4 ❑ Run through the measurements.

5 ❑ Measure a plane on the top surface of the part.

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-43 Choose File type

• Select OFFLINE LEARN EXECUTE.

• Click the EXECUTE button.

FIGURE 35-44 Execute Only

• Take four points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 35-45 Measure XY Plane

Page 358: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

338Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

6 ❑ Measure line 1.

7 ❑ Measure circle 9.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X automatically constructs the coordinate system and alignment.

8 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Take four points on the side of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 35-46 Measure X Axis

• Take four points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 35-47 Measure Circle 9

• Take four points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 35-48 Measure Circle 1

Page 359: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

339Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

9 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

10 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

11 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X automatically constructs the bolt circle and angle dimension.

• Take four points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 35-49 Measure Circle 3

• Take four points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 35-50 Measure Circle 5

• Take four points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 35-51 Measure Circle 7

Page 360: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

340Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

12 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

13 ❑ Repeat Execute?

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Offline Learn Execute.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0002.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-52 Enter Header Information

• Press the BACK button to exit

FIGURE 35-53 Repeat the Program?

Page 361: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 36: Measurement Automation

• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will present how to use the Learn/Execute modes of CAM2 Measure to increase the inspection process of repeat part inspection. After completing this section, the student will be able to create Learn/Execute programs to automate steps of checking a part.

Learn Mode

The LEARN mode creates measurement routines or part programs to

automate a measurement process.

Some of the information stored in a learn command, such as nominals and tolerances, will be familiar. Commands such as target points, highlighted features, and comments are only available in Learn/Execute mode. These are the visual aids to help the operator measure a part.

• Target Points: CAM2 Measure X records the position of the probe for each digitized point as features are measured. The operator will see each point to digitize in the CAD view.

• Highlighted Features: Nominal features may be turned a different color in the CAD view to help the operator determine the correct feature to measure. All nominals assigned to a measured feature will be highlighted automatically.

• Comments: The operator receives instructions in a text window before measuring a feature. This is a good command to use to explain important details about the part.

Online or Offline?

There are different approaches to creating a measurement routine. Some

341Chapter 36: Measurement Automation

Page 362: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 36: Measureme

information is easier to create in Online mode, and other information is easier to create in Offline mode.The table below shows which commands are easier in Online and Offline mode.

Execute ModeThe EXECUTE mode allows the operator to run the finished program. If the operator makes a mistake while measuring and cancels the command, the Learn/Execute program will prompt the operator with the Fail Mode setting in the program:

• Re-measure or Re-start (default): This option will re-measure the last feature, quit, or re-start the program.

• Re-start with Notification: This option will quit or re-start the program.

• Re-start or Backup: This option allows the operator to back up to a previous command in the program, quit, or re-start the program.

Display Results

After each measurement or construction, the results are displayed. The Learn Execute mode of CAM2 Measure has the ability to display the results (On), never display the results (Off), or only display the results when a feature is out of tolerance (Only Out of Tolerance). Each Feature in the program has a DISPLAY OPTIONS parameter.

Important Topics - Measurement

Online OfflineTarget Points CommentsMeasure Template command Adding Nominals (without CAD)Auto Nominal Association (with CAD) Setting TolerancesSetting Views Changing Feature Label NamesAlignments Copy and Pasting groups of

commandsSelecting similar commands for editing as a group

342nt Automation

Page 363: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Automation• Learn files may be created in Online or Offline mode. Offline mode is

used to edit a Learn/Execute file.

• Comments may be used to input user instructions

• There are three fail mode options: Re-measure or Re-start, Re-start with Notification, and Re-start or Backup.

343Chapter 36: Measurement Automation

Page 364: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 365: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Practical Exercise

Selecting Units and Default Tolerances

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-1 Drawing Units

B

B

3 12

A

B

1

C

D

03FRM049-REV 1

B

5 4

5 4 3 2

A

C

D

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWINGIS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TITLE

Armed with Quality

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

FINSH REQUIRED63

15[.591]

[1.181]30

15[.591]

15[.591]

8X 20 [0.798]EQ. SP. ON A

140 [5.512] BC

25[.984]

+0.25-0.10

Ø 1.0 M A B C

A.50

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

25[.984]

100[3.94]

15[.591]

65[2.559]

170[6.693]

4X 5[.197]

50[1.969]

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

C60[2.362]

.50 A

.50

15°

160[6.299]

15[.591]

25[.984]

255[10.04]

20[.787]

40[1.575]

150[5.906]C

265[10.433]

300[11.811]

240[9.449]

65[2.559]

130[5.118]

167[6.575]

15[.591]

15[.591]

50[1.969]

20[.787] 20

[.787]

50[1.969]

65[2.56]

B.50 .50 B

20[.787]

SECTION B-B

345Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 366: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

Start Programming

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type that you are creating.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 37-2 Load Tolerances

• Learn/Execute file = CAM2 Measure Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-3 Choose File type

346nt Automation Practical

Page 367: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ CAM2 Measure is now in OFFLINE mode.

5 ❑ Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button.

Measure the Datum Features

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

FIGURE 37-4 Offline Learn

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 37-5 Measure XY Plane

347Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 368: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

5 ❑ When you see the RESULTS dialog box, there are two buttons that are availible to you:

• Measurement Instructions: Type instructions that will be seen by the user when the user executes the file.

• Highlight: Select a feature to be highlighted during execute. For features that have a nominal, the nominal will be highlighted automatically.

• Label = DATUM_A.

• Datum = A.

FIGURE 37-6 Results

348nt Automation Practical

Page 369: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

8 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

9 ❑ Measure Datum B as a line.

• Enter some text to instruct the user to measure a plane.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 37-7 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-8 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 37-9 Measure X Axis

349Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 370: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

11 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the line.

13 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CYLINDER.

14 ❑ Measure Datum C as a cylinder.

• Label = DATUM_B.

• Datum = B.

FIGURE 37-10 Line Results

• Enter some text to instruct the user to measure a line.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 37-11 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Take nine to twelve points around the cylin-der by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the cylinder and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 37-12 Measure Cylinder 9

350nt Automation Practical

Page 371: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

15 ❑ Take a look at the results.

16 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

Constructing the Measured Alignment

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT > LINE/FEATURE.

• Label = DATUM_C.

• Datum = C.

FIGURE 37-13 Cylinder Results

• Enter some text to instruct the user to measure a cylin-der.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 37-14 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.

• Select a Line = M_DATUM_C.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-15 Construct Point Line/Feature

351Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 372: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

5 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = C_POINT001.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-16 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-17 CAD=Part Alignment

352nt Automation Practical

Page 373: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Form Dimensions

An alignment between the measured features and the nominal features has been completed, continue with the GD&T form dimensions.

1 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select FLATNESS.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the flatness.

3 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select STRAIGHTNESS.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the straightness.

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-18 Flatness

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_B.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-19 Straightness

353Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 374: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

354

5 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select PERPENDICULARITY.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the perpendicularity.

Dimension the concentricity between two bores on the plate. The second bore has not been measured, however; it is possible to measure inside a GD&T command.

7 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select CONCENTRICITY.

8 ❑ Measure the cylinder 10.

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Datum = A.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_C.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-20 Perpendicularity

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Datum = C.

• Select a Feature = Measure as Cyl-inder.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-21 Concentricity

• Take nine to twelve points around the cylin-der by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the cylinder and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 37-22 Measure Cylinder10

nt Automation Practical

Page 375: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

10 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the concentricity.

Position Dimensions

After identifying X, Y, Z on the print, the following hole location data may be determined:

• Label = CYLINDER010.

FIGURE 37-23 Cylinder Results

• Enter some text to instruct the user to measure a cylin-der.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 37-24 Enter a Comment for the Operator

X Y Z Diameter

Circle 1 0.00 mm 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 3 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 5 0.00 mm -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 7 -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

355Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 376: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

Measure circles 1, 3, 5, and 7 in the bolt circle, starting with Circle 1 as indicated on the reference drawing of the demo part.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

3 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-25 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 37-26 Measure Circle 1

356nt Automation Practical

Page 377: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

6 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab in the top of the RESULTS box.

• Label = CIRCLE001_I.

FIGURE 37-27 Circle Results

• Enter some text to instruct the user to measure a cir-cle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 37-28 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 37-29 Results Nominal Tab

357Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 378: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

358

7 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

8 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

9 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will save the tolerance information for the next circle.

10 ❑ Click on the REPORT tab and see the deviations between the measured

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 37-30 Construct Circle Enter Values

• X = unchecked.

• Y = unchecked.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 37-31 Set Tolerances

nt Automation Practical

Page 379: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

and nominal.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

Measure will continue to measure circles until the command is canceled.

12 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

FIGURE 37-32 Tabular Results

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 37-33 Measure Circle 3

359Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 380: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

14 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

15 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• Label = CIRCLE003_I.

FIGURE 37-34 Circle Results

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 37-35 Results Nominal Tab

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 37-36 Construct Circle Enter Values

360nt Automation Practical

Page 381: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

17 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

18 ❑ Take a look at the results.

19 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 37-37 Measure Circle 5

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.

FIGURE 37-38 Circle Results

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 37-39 Results Nominal Tab

361Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 382: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

20 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

21 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

22 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

23 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 37-40 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 37-41 Measure Circle 7

• Label = CIRCLE007_I.

FIGURE 37-42 Circle Results

362nt Automation Practical

Page 383: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

24 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

25 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

26 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 37-43 Results Nominal Tab

• X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 37-44 Construct Circle Enter Values

363Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 384: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

Bolt Circle

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

The nominal Bolt Circle has been constructed using the CAD circles. This will be our nominal for the measured Bolt Circle.

• Selected Choices = N_CIRCLE001, N_CIRCLE003, N_CIRCLE005, N_CIRCLE007.

• Select a Plane = N_CIRCLE001.

• Select NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-45 Construct Nominal Circle

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 37-46 Circle Results

364nt Automation Practical

Page 385: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I, M_CIRCLE007_I.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-47 Construct Best Fit Circle

• Select Nominal = N_BOLT_CIRCLE.

FIGURE 37-48 Bolt Circle Results

365Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 386: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

5 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

Position Dimensions

1 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

• X = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Y = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 37-49 Set Tolerances

• MMC = 1.0.

• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE001_I.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-50 Position

366nt Automation Practical

Page 387: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCE tab.

3 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will update the position tolerances for this file and all the future position commands.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

5 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

7 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

• MMC = checked, Upper Tol = 1.0.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 37-51 Position Tolerances

• MMC = 1.0.

• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE003_I.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-52 Position

• MMC = 1.0.

• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE005_I.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-53 Position

367Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 388: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

9 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

Printing a Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

• MMC = 1.0.

• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE007_I.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-54 Position

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Base Plate Training.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-55 Enter Header Information

368nt Automation Practical

Page 389: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

• Header = Header

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF col-umn. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-56 Report List

• Filename = Base Plate Train-ing.

• Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 37-57 Save Report

369Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 390: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

Modifying and Saving Your Learn file

1 ❑ Click the STOP ONLINE LEARN button. This places you back in the LEARN/EXECUTE window and ends the programming.

2 ❑ Left mouse click on the PRINT GRAPHICAL TEXT command. You may have to scroll down the window on left side of the screen to see this command. It should be the thrid from the bottom of the list.

3 ❑ Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter in the window on the right side of the screen.

4 ❑ Double left mouse click on the MODE Parameter in the window on the

FIGURE 37-58 Offline Learn/Execute

• Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dia-log.

• Allow user to change all user fields = checked.

• Allow user to change all standard fields = unchecked.

• Allow the operator to modify the serial number = checked.

• Auto Increment Serial number = checked.

• Serial Number template = checked, SN####.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-59 Serial Number Template

370nt Automation Practical

Page 391: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

right side of the screen.

5 ❑ Double left mouse click on the PREVIEW Parameter in the window on the right side of the screen.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

• Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dialog.

• Mode = Automatic.

FIGURE 37-60 Save Mode

• Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dia-log.

• Preview = On.

FIGURE 37-61 Preview

• Creator = Your Name.

• Part Name = Base Plate Training.

• Drawing Revision Number = A.

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 37-62 Saving the Learn/Execute

371Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 392: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

Execute Mode

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type that you are running.

4 ❑ From the LIST window, select Base Plate Training.

5 ❑ Click the EXECUTE button.

6 ❑ Run through all the measurements.

7 ❑ Constructions and dimensions are executed automatically.

• Learn/Execute files = CAM2 Measure Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-63 Choose File type

FIGURE 37-64 Select the Basic Measurements Program

372nt Automation Practical

Page 393: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ At the end of program, enter the operator and serial number.

9 ❑ Click OK in REPORT PREVIEW.

10 ❑ Repeat Execute?

11 ❑ Click NO in SAVE CHANGES.

12 ❑ Click CANCEL in LEARN FILES.

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Base Plate Training.

• Serial Number of the current part = SN0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-65 Enter Header Information

• Press to exit

FIGURE 37-66 Repeat the Program?

373Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 394: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

374

nt Automation Practical

Page 395: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image

Creator• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present how to use digital

pictures and a CAM2 Measure Learn Execute program to create a SoftCheck Tool. After completing this section the student will be able to create a SoftCheck Tool.

SoftCheck ToolsSoftCheck Tool is the term for enhanced Learn/Execute programs.

A typical Learn/Execute program takes an operator through the steps of a part program with instruction text prompts and CAD drawings.

A SoftCheck Tool incorporates digital pictures of the part and color-coded targets to make the program more user friendly. Digital video (AVI) and digital audio (WAV) can also be used in a SoftCheck Tool.

Taking Pictures

Take pictures to show an operator exactly where to take the measurements. Take close-up shots of areas where detail is needed. Orient the camera in the same way that the operator will be looking at the part.

While taking pictures, include as many features in a shot without sacrificing space, picture clarity, and quality. Capturing a big cluster of features from far away will not provide enough detailed information for the operator. One picture can be used as many times as needed. The ideal image size is 640x480 pixels, most cameras have an adjustable setting for the size of a picture.

One picture of the entire part must be taken to use as an icon in SoftCheck Tool Manager.

375Chapter 38: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator

Page 396: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Creating Dig

Image Creator

Each point during the execution of a program will require its own picture and target point. The picture must have a specific name and location for the software to properly associate it with its corresponding measurement.

FARO’s Image Creator program makes the photo editing process faster and easier.

The Green Ball

A standard FARO SoftCheck Tool uses the image of a green sphere as a target. The color green indicates that the probe must make contact with the surface

and the FRONT button must be pressed. A red sphere indicates where the BACK button must be pressed.

An image library will automatically load with Image Creator. The target balls will be dragged from the image library to the digital picture. There is a complete green ball, red ball, 24 partial balls, and a shadow in the image library.

3D Effects

The shadow is used to give some depth to the red ball or compensation point. The shadow demonstrates that the ball is floating above a surface.

Independent Comments

Independent comments in the program can have pictures. The OFFLINE EDIT mode will prompt for the name of the picture file.

A comment at the beginning of each program to instruct the operator to follow the green ball and press the correct button will help the operator understand the concept of the green and red sphere. AVI and WAV files can be used in comments.

376ital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator

Page 397: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Hot Keys for Image Creator

Important Topics - Creating Digital Pictures• A picture that shows the entire part should be taken for use as the

icon in SoftCheck Tool Manager.

• Take several close up pictures of the part that shows the features that are to be measured. This will help the operator to understand which features is to be measured.

• Icons must be created to use the Pack Tool command. The Pack Tool command is designed to create a single file to transport the SoftCheck Tool to another computer.

Keystroke Function

É Help

D Delete

N Enlarge

- Shrink

C+W Previous Frame

C+X Next Frame

A+W Rotate Counter-Clockwise

A+X Rotate Clockwise

S Select

377Chapter 38: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator

Page 398: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 399: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image

Creator Practical

Practical ExerciseTaking and Importing Images

1 ❑ Use the Digital Camera to take pictures of the part.

2 ❑ From the START menu, select ALL PROGRAMS < FARO < IMAGE CREATOR.

NOTE: The CAM2 Measure portlock must be enabled for SoftCheck Tools to use Image Creator.

NOTE: A part program must be created to use Image Creator. Copy the jpg files to the CAM2 MEASURE\LEARN\(PART NAME)\BASE IMAGES directory.

3 ❑ Select the BASE PLATE TRAINING.

Image Creator will prompt for the first base image.

4 ❑ Click the IMPORT button.

5 ❑ Navigate to the removable drive that contains the images.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 39-1 Open file

379Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 400: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 39: Creating Dig

6 ❑ Select the images.

7 ❑ Select an image.

The first measured feature on your program appears in the Tree View. The Point Number field is automatically set to Point 1.

Adding the Green/Red Balls

1 ❑ From the EDIT menu, select MOVE MODE. This allows the green/red balls to be dragged from the image library to the base image.

2 ❑ Click and drag the green target ball from the image library to the base image.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 39-2 Open Images

• Click SELECT.

FIGURE 39-3 Select Image

FIGURE 39-4 Image Creator

380ital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 401: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Re-size the green ball.

• From the LAYER menu, select ENLARGE. The ENLARGE command will increase the size of the ball.

• From the LAYER menu, select SHRINK. The SHRINK command will reduce the size of the ball.

4 ❑ From the FRAME menu, select NEXT.

NOTE: The NEXT button saves the location and size of the ball for the point. The image will get created with the SAVE JPGS command.

5 ❑ Move the ball to the next target location.

6 ❑ From the FRAME menu, select NEXT.

7 ❑ Repeat for all points.

8 ❑ When you get to the compensation point, the green ball will automatically turn into the red ball with a shadow.

9 ❑ Click and drag the image into position.

10 ❑ Rotate the image.

• From the EDIT menu, select ROTATE MODE. The ROTATE command will spin the ball.

• Click and hold the left mouse button on the base image. Scroll left to right to rotate the ball.

11 ❑ From the FRAME menu, select NEXT.

12 ❑ Repeat this section for all measured features.

13 ❑ Change the base image. From the FRAME menu, select CHANGE BASE IMAGE.

NOTE: The partial balls are used to give the three-dimensional illusion that the ball is behind an object. To indicate that a point should be taken inside or behind a feature, select the partial ball that best fits the situation.

NOTE: You are encouraged to do the pictures in the same order as the features in the program. This way, you take advantage of the auto increment feature in Image Creator.

381Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 402: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 39: Creating Dig

Creating Images, Icons and Reports

To run your programs in the SoftCheck Tool Manager, you need to make a couple of icons or buttons to start the program. Ideally, you will use one picture of the part to create these icons.

1 ❑ From the SCT menu, select SAVE JPEGS.

2 ❑ From the SCT menu, select SCTM ICONS.

3 ❑ Click the SET button for the BIG image.

4 ❑ Click OK.

5 ❑ From the SCT menu, select REPORT IMAGE.

6 ❑ Click the SET button.

7 ❑ Click OK.

Saving the Image List

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

This saves the image list as an Image Creator file (*.icp).

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

• Select the Base Image.

• Click SELECT.

FIGURE 39-5 SCTM Icons

• Select the Base Image.

• Click SELECT.

FIGURE 39-6 Report Icons

382ital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 403: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Preview the SoftCheck Tool in CAM2 Measure

You can also view the pictures without having to run the program.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

5 ❑ Highlight the MEASURE PLANE command.

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 39-7 Choose File type

• Click NO to save changes.

• Select Base Plate Train-ing.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 39-8 Open SoftCheck Tool

383Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 404: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 39: Creating Dig

6 ❑ From the TOOL BUILDER menu, select PREVIEW COMMENTS.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

8 ❑ Click YES to save changes.

9 ❑ If picutres need to be modified, use Image Creator, then return to CAM2 Measure to preview the comments.

Execute the SoftCheck Tool

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

4 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN will cycle through the program by command.

• UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW will cycle through the program by point.

• The text com-ments can be edited while pre-viewing the pic-tures.

FIGURE 39-9 Preview Comments

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 39-10 Choose File type

384ital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 405: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Select the program.

6 ❑ Run through all the measurements.

• Select Base Plate Training.

• Click EXECUTE.

FIGURE 39-11 Execute SoftCheck Tool

385Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 406: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 407: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 40: SoftCheck Tool Manager

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate the capabilities of SoftCheck Tool Manager Program. After completing this section, the student will be able to set up Part and Operator preferences and navigate through SoftCheck Tool Manager.

Using the SoftCheck Tool ManagerThe SoftCheck Tool Manager (SCTM) is an HTML-based program that serves as a Player for SCTs (SoftCheck Tools).

SoftCheck Tool Manager has the look and feel of a web site with large buttons to navigate through the different options. The SoftCheck Tool Manager can be installed on the computer by selecting the CUSTOM install from the CAM2 Measure installation CD.

Navigating the SCTM

Main Screen

The Control Station touch screen computer opens to the main SCTM screen.

• Administrator: This area is designated for the person responsible for managing the Control Station.

• New Operator: New operators are prompted to select their assigned User ID and enter their personal password twice for verification to begin working for the first time. Once a password is entered, the operator can go directly to OPERATOR LOGIN screen.

• Operator Login: Operators are prompted to select their User ID and enter the password to begin working.

• Tool List: The large, green ball in the center of the screen takes the operator straight to the public SCT library.

• Log Off Operator: Logs off the current operator.

• CAM2 Measure: Launch CAM2 Measure.

• System Off: Shuts down the Control Station.

387Chapter 40: SoftCheck Tool Manager

Page 408: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 40: SoftCheck To

NOTE: If there is no administrator account set on the Control Station, all SCTs are considered public and all areas are available to anyone. An administrator has the rights to set operator accounts and assign or restrict their use of SCTs.

Tool List

In the Tool List you have series of picture icons/buttons that represent your SCTs. The NAMES button changes the large buttons to small buttons and full program names. To return to the large button screen touch the PICTURES button.

To start a program touch the picture.

TOOL KITS: The Tool Kits allow the operator to create programs using simple macros. The macros can be linked together to create a larger program.

Administrator

PREFERENCES, SHORTCUTS, TOOL MANAGEMENT, OPERATOR SETUP, DATA MANAGEMENT and BACKUP are found in the ADMINISTRATOR area.

PREFERENCES: Set default values for System Options, Tool Options and Operator Options.

• SYSTEM OPTIONS: Change the look of the program by setting the default screens when the machine is turned on. This also eliminates the number of different screen options or tool list modes displayed for an operator.

• PATHS: You can view and modify the system paths for the Control Station.

SHORTCUTS: In this area are shortcuts to Windows Explorer, Windows Notepad, CAM2 SPC Graph and the SoftCheck Tool web site.

TOOL MANAGEMENT: Manage the SoftCheck Tools on your Control Station.

• ADD FOLDER: Adds a folder to the SoftCheck Tool List.

• MOVE TO FOLDER: Moves the selected tool to a different folder.

• DELETE: Removes a SoftCheck Tool or folder from the computer.

388ol Manager

Page 409: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

• LOAD TOOL: Adds a SoftCheck Tool from a removable drive (CD, 1.44 diskette, Microdrive) or browse the drives for a Packed Tool.

• DOWNLOAD FROM WEB: Link to FARO’s Control Station website.

• PRINT TOOL LIST: Sends a file to the printer of a list of tools on the Control Station.

• SAVE TOOL LIST: Saves a file that has a list of tools on the Control Station.

• TOOL OPTIONS: Set access rights for SCTs by touching the underlined parameters.

• Archived Status: Current means that the program is available in the tool list. Archive removes the program form the tool list. (It can be made current at any time.)

• User ID Required: No makes the tool available to anyone. Yes requires an operator to be logged in to run the SCT.

• Serial Number Required: No does not prompt the operator to input a serial number. Yes requires an operator to input a serial number.

• Auto Serial Number: No does not auto increment serial num-bers. Yes auto increments serial numbers.

OPERATOR SETUP: Add operators and access their tool privileges.

• OPERATOR NAMES: Add, delete, or modify operators. Assign user IDs, initalize or modify passwords. The RESET PASSWORD box allows users to enter their own password the first time they log in to the system. They will have to log in as new user.

• OPERATOR OPTIONS: Set the Default Tool List Mode for each operator. (Pictures, Names or System)

• TOOL ACCESS: Assign tools to a registered operator.

DATA MANAGEMENT: View, archive, import, export and delete reports.

389Chapter 40: SoftCheck Tool Manager

Page 410: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 40: SoftCheck To

BACKUP: Backup and recover SoftCheck Tools and Data.

• PATH: Set the location of the backup file.

• BACKUP FREQUENCY: Set the time of day for automatic backup.

• RESTORE FROM BACKUP: Restores the Control Station from the Backup file.

Important Topics - SoftCheck Tool Manager• SoftCheck Tool Manager is the player for SoftCheck Tools.

• SoftCheck Tools that are played through SoftCheck Tool Manager do not require a portlock.

NOTE: The first time a program is run on a new computer a password must be entered to authorize the computer to run without a portlock. The password can be obtained from FARO’s customer service department.

• The report names are controlled by the serial number of the part. To enter a serial number for a part you must activate the SERIAL NUMBER REQUIRED or AUTO SERIAL NUMBER option in the TOOL MANAGEMENT > TOOL OPTIONS page.

• A SoftCheck Tool that does not have an icon will be displayed as a large green ball in the TOOL LIST.

390ol Manager

Page 411: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

PRACTICAL EXERCISETransferring SCTs to a New Computer

To transfer files from the Control Station to another computer, the PACK TOOL command will be used. This is available in the OFFLINE mode of LEARN EXECUTE in the TOOL BUILDER menu. The PACK TOOL command compresses all the files for a SoftCheck Tool into one file.

To transfer files from the programming computer:

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 41-1 Choose File type

• Click NO to save changes.

• Select Base Plate Training.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 41-2 Open SoftCheck Tool

391Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Page 412: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 41: SoftCheck To

5 ❑ From the TOOL BUILDER menu, select PACK TOOL.

6 ❑ Select the Image Files.

7 ❑ Click NEXT.

8 ❑ Select the Report Formats and Compression.

9 ❑ Click FINISH.

NOTE: The Base Plate Training.cab file is created and stored in the DOCUMENTS AND SETTINGS\ALL USERS\APPLICATION DATA\FARO directory.

10 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

11 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

12 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• SCT File = checked.

• JPG Images = checked.

• Tool Settings File = unchecked.

• SCT Image Files = Select All.

• SCT Base Image Files = Select All.

• SPC Graph Files = Select All.

FIGURE 41-3 Pack Tool 1

• Report Format Files = No.

• Spanning = No.

FIGURE 41-4 Pack Tool 2

• Click OK.

FIGURE 41-5 Creating CAB file

392ol Manager Practical

Page 413: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

SoftCheck Tool Setup

1 ❑ From START menu, select ALL PROGRAMS > FARO > SOFTCHECK TOOL MANAGER.

2 ❑ Click on the ADMINISTRATOR button.

• Administrator name = Administrator name.

• Password Entry = password.

3 ❑ Click LOGIN.

4 ❑ Click the TOOL MANAGEMENT button.

FIGURE 41-6 SoftCheck Tool Manager

FIGURE 41-7 Administrator

393Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Page 414: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 41: SoftCheck To

5 ❑ Click the TOOL OPTIONS button.

6 ❑ Click the BASE PLATE TRAINING SoftCheck tool.

7 ❑ Click on the AUTO SERIAL NUMBER link to modify the serial number option for BASE PLATE TRAINING.

8 ❑ Click OK.

• Archive Status = Current.

• Operator Required = Yes.

• Serial Number Required = No.

• Auto Serial Num-ber = Yes.

FIGURE 41-8 Tool Options

• Auto Serial Num-ber = checked.

• Part Serial Num-ber = SN####.

• Next Serial Num-ber = 3.

• Next Part Serial = blank.

FIGURE 41-9 Auto Serial Number

394ol Manager Practical

Page 415: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ Click the TOOL LIST button.

10 ❑ Click the BASE PLATE TRAINING button.

11 ❑ Measure the part.

FIGURE 41-10 Tool List

395Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Page 416: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 417: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 42: Advanced Graphical Reporting

• OBJECTIVE - To learn to communicate measurement results effectively with Graphical Reporting. After completing this section, the student will know how to interpret charts and set up CAM2 Measure X and CAM2 SPC Graph to work together.

Saving Data to CAM2 SPC Graph

CAM2 SPC Graph requires two files to create a report. The first is the picture or view file, the second is the measurement data.

NOTE: All data is exported to SPC GRAPH\(PART NAME) directory. The name of the Learn\Execute program is in a folder in the CAM2 SPC Graph directory.

Using Pictures from a Digital Camera

Digital pictures may be imported into CAM2 SPC Graph as an EMF or BMP. Most digital cameras store pictures in JPG (JPEG) format. Use an image editing program to convert the JPGs as EMF or BMP. Store the digital picture in the SPCGRAPH\(PART NAME) directory.

TIP: Save the picture in the same orientation that the part will be measured.

Chart Types

RUN CHART - A Run Chart plots the actual values of a measured feature over time. It tracks long-term trends and patterns to assist in determining when intervention is needed in a process by revealing unusual patterns in measurement.

RANGE CHART - A Range Chart calculates a value of a spread of numbers or data. The range is determined by subtracting the lowest number from the highest number in the group. The range variations are plotted over time. This shows the variations of a range of measurements in the process.

397Chapter 42: Advanced Graphical Reporting

Page 418: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 42: Advanced G

AVERAGE CHART - An Average Chart calculates the mean (average) of a group of numbers. The mean values are plotted over time. This shows the variations of an average of measurements in the process.

CAM2 SPC Graph plots the nominal data, the measurement average, and the upper and lower control limits, which are automatically calculated based on the data. The Cp and the Cpk ratio is calculated and displayed on the bottom of the chart.

GROUP SIZE - The CHART, # IN EACH GROUP field specifies the number of measurements to merge. Each point on the Average Chart equals the average of the values in each group. Each group is organized sequentially by date.

Advanced Chart OptionsPROCESS CAPABILITY INDICES (Cp & Cpk) - At the bottom of the Preview window is the Process Capability (Cp) ratio. This compares the actual variation of the process with the requirements. It measures the precision and performance of the process, but not necessarily the accuracy. A Cp ratio of less than one means that the process is not capable of meeting specifications because the variation is higher than the requirements.

While the Cp measures precision, it only indicates the potential of the process to meet the requirements. The Cpk ratio, also at the bottom of the PREVIEW window, measures accuracy and precision. The Cpk ratio takes into consideration the process variation, and how close it is to nominal. It is advantageous to refer not only to the Cp, but also to the Cpk ratio.

Every process is subject to classification based on capability and control. The four general cases that we may use to classify a process are illustrated in the following charts:

Case 1

Case 3 Case 4

Process VariationProcess Variation

+Tol

Nominal

-Tol

Process VariationAverage

Case 2

Process Variation+Tol

Nominal

-Tol

Average

+Tol

Nominal

-Tol

+Tol

Nominal

-Tol

AverageAverage

Process "in control" (Cp>1, Cpk>1)Meeting Requirements = "Acceptable"

Process "in control" (Cp>1, Cpk<1)Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable"

Process "not in control" (Cp<1, Cpk<1)Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable" Process "not in control" (Cp<1, Cpk<1)

Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable"

398raphical Reporting

Page 419: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

399

• Case 1 represents a desirable scenario because the process is in control, meaning that it has variation within the established tolerance and the average measurements meet the required nominal values.

• Case 2 is not desired because even though the process variation is small keeping it in control, the average measurements are far from nominal, not meeting the requirements.

• Case 3 may be seen as desirable or not, depending on the customer’s concerns. Clearly, we see that the process varies more than the specification, but overall, it meets the average requirements.

• Case 4 is not desired because of excess process variation and deviation from nominal.

Important Topics - Advanced Graphical Reporting

• The Cp and Cpk values for a feature will be displayed on the bottom of the Range, Average and Run chart.

• The # in each group value will change the sample size for Range and Average charts.

• There must be more than 5 sets of data to create a chart.

Chapter 42: Advanced Graphical Reporting

Page 420: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 421: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

• OBJECTIVE - To learn to communicate measurement results effectively with Graphical Reporting. After completing this section, the student will be able to set up CAM2 Measure X and CAM2 SPC GRAPH to work together automatically.

PRACTICAL ExerciseModify the Learn/Execute Program

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

• Learn/Execute file = CAM2 Measure Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-1 Choose File type

• Click NO to save changes.

• Select Base Plate Train-ing.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 43-2 Open SoftCheck Tool

401Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 422: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 43: Advanced G

5 ❑ Left mouse click on REPEAT EXECUTE to highlight the last command.

6 ❑ From the MISC menu, select EXPORT DATA < EXPORT DATA.

7 ❑ Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter.

NOTE: Un-checking all the parameters will allow the report to use the same serial number of the Graphical Text Report.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

9 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

Running the Learn Execute Program

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

4 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Allow user to change all user fields = unchecked.

• Allow user to change all standard fields = unchecked.

• Allow the operator to modify the serial num-ber = unchecked.

• Auto Increment Serial number = unchecked.

• Serial Number template = unchecked.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-3 Auto Increment Serial number

• Learn/Execute file = CAM2 Measure Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-4 Choose File type

402raphical Reporting Practical

Page 423: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Select the program.

6 ❑ Run through all the measurements.

7 ❑ After the last measurement, press YES to repeat the part measurement.

8 ❑ Repeat the program 4 more times.

9 ❑ After the fifth run, click NO in REPEAT EXECUTE.

10 ❑ Click NO in SAVE CHANGES.

11 ❑ Click CANCEL in LEARN FILES.

12 ❑ From the FILE menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS > EXPORT DATA.

• Select Base Plate Training.

• Click EXECUTE.

FIGURE 43-5 Execute SoftCheck Tool

FIGURE 43-6 Repeat the Program?

• Export Measurement Data = unchecked.

• Export Picture = checked.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-7 Export Data

403Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 424: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 43: Advanced G

13 Name the view.

Creating a SPC Graph Template

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS < SPC GRAPH X.

1 ❑ SPC Graph displays the list of parts.

• Part Name = Basic Plate Training.

• View Name = View1.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-8 Save View

FIGURE 43-9 SPC Graph

404raphical Reporting Practical

Page 425: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ On the left side of the screen is the PARTS LIST window. Double left mouse click on BASE PLATE TRAINING.

• The PART window is added on top of the PARTS LIST window and displays a tree that contains the folders of measurement files and picture files.

• A Master Template is loaded into the canvas (right screen).

3 ❑ Click on the plus sign (+) next to MASTER TEMPLATES to display all templates.

4 ❑ Double left mouse click on COLOR TEMPLATE 3.AG2.

NOTE: Color Template 3 is the landscape format with the header at the top of the page.

FIGURE 43-10 Training CAD to Part

405Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 426: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 43: Advanced G

5 ❑ Double left mouse click on the VIEW1.EMF file under the DRAWINGS list.

• The picture is now added to the canvas.

• Click and drag the picture around to place it on the canvas.

• Click and drag the corners of the picture to change the size.

6 ❑ Double left mouse click on the SN0001.mes measurement set under the MEASURMENTS folder.

Adding Run Charts to the template

1 ❑ Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree.

FIGURE 43-11 Adding the View

• The measurement set expands and shows all the fea-tures in the measurement file.

FIGURE 43-12 Part List Tree

406raphical Reporting Practical

Page 427: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

Adding Range Charts to the template

1 ❑ Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree.

X Y Z Dia Form MMC

C_FLATNESS001 X

C_PERPENDICULARITY001 X

C_STRAIGHTNESS001 X

C_CONCENTRICITY001 X

M_CIRCLE001 X

M_CIRCLE003 X

M_CIRCLE005 X

M_CIRCLE007 X

C_BOLT_CIRCLE X X X

C_POSITION001 X

C_POSITION003 X

C_POSITION005 X

C_POSITION007 X

• Chart Type = Run Chart.

• Feature/Parameter = see Table.

• Click the PREVIEW button to view the chart.

• Click OK to add the chart to the template.

FIGURE 43-13 Run Chart

407Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 428: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 43: Advanced G

2 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

Adding Average Charts to the template

1 ❑ Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree.

2 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

Align Icons

You may want to experiment with the ALIGN commands in the OBJECT MENU < ALIGN. These align tables/charts to the table/chart you select last. For example, if you wanted to align the centers of a series of tables in a vertical column, you would:

1 ❑ Hold the SHIFT key down and select the tables that should align to the same horizontal position.

2 ❑ Continue to hold down the SHIFT key and select the table that is at the correct position.

• Chart Type = Range Chart.

• Feature/Parameter = see Table.

• # in Each Group = 2.

• Click the PREVIEW button to view the chart.

• Click OK to add the chart to the template.

FIGURE 43-14 Range Chart

• Chart Type = Average Chart.

• Feature/Parameter = see Table.

• # in Each Group = 2.

• Click the PREVIEW button to view the chart.

• Click OK to add the chart to the template.

FIGURE 43-15 Average Chart

408raphical Reporting Practical

Page 429: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select ALIGN < ALIGN HORIZONTAL CENTERS.

Saving the Report

1 ❑ When you are finished arranging the tables and the CAD view on the canvas, save it as a report.

This is called a Part Template because you may use one part template for many measurement sessions.

2 ❑ Save the file.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

Adding a Preview to the Program

Return to CAM2 Measure Learn/Execute Offline Programing Dialog Box.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the

• From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

• Select PART TEMPLATE.

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 43-16 Saving a Part Template

• File name = Page 1.

• Save as type = AG2Doc Files (*.ag2).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 43-17 Save As

409Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 430: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 43: Advanced G

portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

1 ❑ Click on GRAPHICAL TEXT REPORT.

2 ❑ From the EDIT menu, select DELETE.

3 ❑ From the MISC menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS > SAVE SPC GRAPH REPORT.

4 ❑ Name the temporary .jpg file.

NOTE: The .jpg file is a temporary file that CAM2 Measure creates in order to display the report.

• Learn/Execute file = CAM2 Measure Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-18 Choose File type

• Click NO to save changes.

• Select Base Plate Training.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 43-19 Open SoftCheck Tool

• Part Name = Base Plate Training.

• Part Template = Page 1.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-20 Adding an SPC Graph report

• File name = Page 1.

• File of type = (*.jpg).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 43-21 Save JPG

410raphical Reporting Practical

Page 431: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Click on SAVE GRAPHICAL REPORT.

6 ❑ Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

• Allow user to change all user fields = unchecked.

• Allow user to change all standard fields = unchecked.

• Allow the operator to modify the serial num-ber = unchecked.

• Auto Increment Serial number = unchecked.

• Serial Number template = unchecked.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-22 Auto Increment

411Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 432: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 433: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present feature reducibility and the differences between the coordinate systems. After completing this section, the student will be able to create coordinate systems with fewer constructions.

Feature ReducibilityFill in the chart below:

Plane Line Point

Arc X X X

Circle X X X

Cylinder X

Cone X X X

Ellipse X X X

Line X

413Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Page 434: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Intermediate

3-2-1 TYPE Coordinate Systems

Each coordinate system levels the plane (XY, YZ or XZ), rotates the axis (X, Y or Z) and sets the origin. 3-2-1 means that three points define a plane that sets one axis, two points define a line that locks a second axis, and one point defines an origin.

There are 2 factors that distinguish the eight different coordinate systems.

1 The selected features (plane, line or point).

2 How the features are used.

Plane X

Point X

Rectan-gular Slot

X X X

Round Slot

X X X

Sphere X

Plane Line Point

414 Coordinate Systems

Page 435: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Coordinate Systems

Coordinate Systems using a Plane, Line, and Point in Different Ways

• The 3-2-1 Coordinate System uses the point as the origin.

• The Separate Origin Coordinate System projects the point

to the plane for the origin.

• The Perpendicular Intersect Coordinate System projects

the point to the line for the origin.

FIGURE 44-1 3-2-1 Coordinate System

FIGURE 44-2 Separate Origin Coordinate System

FIGURE 44-3 Perpendicular Coordinate System

X

YZ

X

YZ

X

YZ

415Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Page 436: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Intermediate

416

Coordinate Systems using a Plane and Two Lines

• The Line-Line Intersect Coordinate System creates the

origin from the intersection of the two lines. The first line defines the direction of the X-axis.

• The Bore Coordinate System creates the origin from the

intersection of the plane and the second line. Notice that the second line must intersect the plane at a single point and cannot lie on the plane.

Other Coordinate Systems using Different Features

• The 3 Plane Coordinate System uses the first plane selected as the XY plane, the second plane intersects the first to create the X-axis, and the third plane intersects the other two to create the origin.

FIGURE 44-4 Line/Line Coordinate System

FIGURE 44-5 Bore Coordinate System

FIGURE 44-6 3 Plane Coordinate System

X

YZ

X

YZ

X

YZ

1

3

2

Coordinate Systems

Page 437: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

• The 3 Point Coordinate System sets the origin at the first point, the X-axis from the first point to the second, and the XY plane on the third point.

• The MidPoint Coordinate System sets the origin at the

midpoint of the line selected.

Change Coordinate System Discussion

Rotation allows the coordinate system to spin about any axis or line. Use the right-hand rule to determine which rotation direction is positive. Point the thumb of your right hand along the positive axis or line direction. The direction your fingers wrap is the positive direction of rotation.

Translation allows you to move the coordinate system to a specific point in space, either from a previous coordinate system or to any other relative feature or along a line.

FIGURE 44-7 3 Point Coordinate System

FIGURE 44-8 Midpoint Coordinate System

X

YZ

12

3

X

YZ

1

2

417Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Page 438: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Intermediate

Important Topics - Intermediate Alignments• It is possible to create multiple coordinate systems and switch between

them.

• A 3-2-1 Coordinate System may be constructed using a slot.

• Two circles may be used in place of a line for a coordinate system.

• The Translation function can:

• Move the origin to a specific feature.

• Move the origin to a specific XYZ value.

• Offset the origin a specific XYZ distance from a feature.

418 Coordinate Systems

Page 439: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

PRACTICAL ExerciseStart with a new file and load the correct part preferences to work on this practical.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

4 ❑ Click OK to exit.

NOTE: Loading the Metric-0.25mm file will change all the tolerances to +/-0.25mm. This will be the default value for every new feature added to CAM2 Measure.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 45-2 Load Tolerances

419Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 440: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

5 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD.

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 45-3 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 45-4 Adding CAD Parts

420 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 441: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

Measuring the Alignment Features

Circles 1, 3, and 7 are the features for the Alignment. Use the Measurement Template command and choose these three nominal features from the CAD model. The MEASURE TEMPLATE command automatically guides you though the measurement of the three circles.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

FIGURE 45-5 FARO_Demo_part1.igs

• From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select Circle.

• Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 45-6 Measurement Template

421Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 442: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

2 ❑ Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template.

• Click on Circle 1 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 45-7 Circle 1

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 highlights red.

FIGURE 45-8 Circle 1 Results

• Click on Circle 3 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 45-9 Circle 3

422 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 443: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE003.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 and Circle 3 highlights red.

FIGURE 45-10 Circle 3 Results

• Click on Circle 7 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 45-11 Circle 7

• Label = CIRCLE007.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1, Circle 3 and Circle 7 highlights red.

FIGURE 45-12 Circle 7 Results

423Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 444: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

8 ❑ Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and return to the Measurment Template.

9 ❑ Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not been measured; however, CAM2 has an option to define a plane during a 2D feature command.

10 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Notice that Circle 1 highlights red. This is to guide to the correct circle.

11 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

FIGURE 45-13 Measurement Template

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-14 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-15 Measure XY Plane

424 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 445: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

12 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

13 ❑ Take a look at the results and click OK to continue.

14 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

15 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-16 Measure Circle 1

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-17 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-18 Measure Circle 3

425Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 446: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

16 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

17 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-19 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-20 Measure Circle 7

FIGURE 45-21 Measurement Results

426 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 447: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Setting an Iterative Alignment

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command will stop. The calculations may solve quickly and not appear to change.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

3-2-1

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001, M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE007.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-22 Iterative Alignment

• Check the MAX ERROR of the Iterative Alignment. For this part the value should be in tolerance.

• Notice the error between each of the measured circles and its associated nominal.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 45-23 Iterative Alignment Results

427Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 448: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

2 ❑ Measure the plane on top of the plate.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

5 ❑ Measure Sphere C.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-24 Measure XY Plane

• Label = BASE_PLANE.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-25 Plane Results

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-26 Measure Sphere C

428 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 449: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

8 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

9 ❑ Measure the line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G. Start from the edge by Sphere A, working towards Sphere B.

• Label = SPHERE_C.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-27 Sphere Results

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-28 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-29 Measure X Axis

429Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 450: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

11 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the 3-2-1 coordinate system is the centerpoint of the sphere.

Separate Origin

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <

• Label = LINE_FRONT.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-30 Line Results

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = M_SPHERE_C.

• Select the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-31 3-2-1 Coordinate System

430 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 451: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

SEPARATE ORIGIN.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Separate Origin coordinate system is the center point of the sphere projected to the base plane.

Perpendicular Intersect

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < PERPENDICULAR INTERSECT.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the perpendicular intersection coordinate system is the center point of the sphere projected to the line.

Bore

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.

• Origin = M_SPHERE_C.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-32 Separate Origin Coordinate System

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.

• Origin = M_SPHERE_C.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-33 Perpendicular Intersect Coordinate System

431Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 452: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

3 ❑ Define the Plane.

4 ❑ Measure Circle 10.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-34 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the surface of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-35 Measure XY Plane

• Take four to five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the circle and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-36 Measure Circle 10

432 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 453: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < BORE.

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Bore coordinate system is at the intersection of the second line with the plane.

Line-Line

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <

• Label = CIRCLE010_I.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-37 Cylinder Results

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.

• Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown.

• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C.

• Second Point on Line = M_CIRCLE010_I.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-38 Bore Coordinate System

433Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 454: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

LINE-LINE.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Line-Line coordinate system is at the intersection of the two lines projected to the plane.

Midpoint

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere B.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.

• Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown.

• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C.

• Second Point on Line = M_CIRCLE010_I.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-39 Line/Line Intersect Coordinate System

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-40 Measure Sphere B

434 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 455: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < MIDPOINT.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the X-axis is positive in the direction that the spheres were selected. The origin is the midpoint of the line projected to the plane.

3 Point

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

• Label = SPHERE_B.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-41 Sphere Results

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Click on the toggle button next to the LINE DEFINED X AXIS toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON X AXIS and SECOND POINT ON X AXIS dropdown.

• First Point on X Axis = M_SPHERE_C.

• Second Point on X Axis = M_SPHERE_B.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-42 Midpoint Coordinate System

435Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 456: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

2 ❑ Measure Sphere D.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3 POINT.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the XY plane is defined by the three points. The X axis is defined by a line between sphere C and sphere B. The origin is at the

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-43 Measure Sphere D

• Label = SPHERE_D.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-44 Sphere Results

• Select Origin = M_SPHERE_C.

• Point on +X = M_SPHERE_B.

• Point on +XY = M_SPHERE_D.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-45 3 Point Coordinate System

436 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 457: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

centerpoint of sphere C.

3 Plane

1 ❑ From the CONSTUCT menu, select PLANE > PERPENDICULAR.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Select a Point = M_SPHERE_C.

• Click the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown.

• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_D.

• Second Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-46 Construct Plane Perpendicular

• Label = PLANE_LEFT.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-47 Plane Results

437Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 458: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

3 ❑ From the CONSTUCT menu, select PLANE > PERPENDICULAR.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3 PLANE.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

• Select a Point = M_SPHERE_B.

• Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown.

• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_D.

• Second Point on Line = M_SPHERE_B.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-48 Construct Plane Perpendicular

• Label = PLANE_FRONT.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-49 Plane Results

• Select XY Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Select Plane 2 = C_PLANE_FRONT.

• Select Plane 3 = C_PLANE_LEFT.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-50 3 Plane Coordinate System

438 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 459: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

NOTE: Notice that the intersection of Base plane and Front plane defines the X-axis and the origin is at the intersection of the three planes.

Set Active Coordinate System

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < SET ACTIVE.

Change Coordinate System

Rotation

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < ROTATION.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the coordinate system was rotated so that the X axis is oriented parallel to the front of the base.

Translation

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <

• Set Active = C_COORDSYS007 (the 3 Point coordinate system).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-51 Set Active Coordinate System

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS007.

• Line Defined axis = +Z_C_COORDSYS007.

• by = 20.2 degrees.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-52 Rotate Coordinate System

439Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 460: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

TRANSLATION.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin was translated to the corner of the part using the X value of Sphere C, the Y value of Sphere B, and the Z value of Circle 10.

• Select X Origin = M_SPHERE_C.

• X Offset = -15.0.

• Select Y Origin = M_SPHERE_B.

• Y Offset = -15.0.

• Select Z Origin = M_CIRCLE010_I.

• Z Offset = -12.0.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS009.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-53 Translate Coordinate System

440 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 461: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Advanced Coordinate System

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present how to establish coordinate systems when information on the datums are limited. After completing this section, the student will be able to use constructions to establish coordinate systems.

Calculated Coordinate SystemThere will be situations in which the datum information is sufficient to define a coordinate system (plane, line, and point), but the origin is not located at the datums. The datums are structured such that using a rotation and translation technique would be extremely difficult, if not impossible.

In the situation described below, a coordinate system will be established using the indicated datums. The print also indicates that target locations should be

used to define the datums instead of directly measuring the datum features. The information from this print will be used to construct datum features from the specified targets.

FIGURE 46-1 Print with Datum Targets

B

B

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWINGIS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TITLE

Armed with Quality

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

FINSH REQUIRED63

A

50 50

C1B1A1

B2A2

A310

C

B

135

35.35

441Chapter 46: Advanced Coordinate System

Page 462: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Advanced C

CAD=PartThis function requires that some type of coordinate system on the part has been constructed using measured features. Selecting CAD=PART sets the current coordinate system equal to the CAD or Nominal coordinate system (also called the world coordinate system) and moves all the measured data to the CAD coordinate system. The measurements are then overlaid onto the CAD or nominal data.

To use CAD=PART, the coordinate system on the part must match the coordinate system of the CAD. In many cases, the origin of the coordinate system will not be on the part, and a translation or rotation will be necessary to get the coordinate system to the correct location.

Constructions2 Offset Line

This function constructs a line (typically a coordinate axis) where there is a

known offset. When a part defines a datum with two target location and the points do not lie on the datum line, the Construct Line, 2 Offset command may be used to construct the line. This command may also be used as rotate function by entering the offset values instead of the rotation angle. The offset direction is always to the right side of the two points.

FIGURE 46-2 2 Point 2 Offset Line

1

2

442oordinate System

Page 463: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 Offset Plane

This function constructs a plane (typically a coordinate plane) where there is more than one offset for the points. When a part defines a datum with three target locations and the points do not lie on the datum plane, the Construct Plane, 3 Offset command may be used to construct the plane. The plane is constructed above or below the selected points. The order that the points are selected is used to determine the offset direction. Use the right-hand rule to determine the offset direction.

Important Topics - Advanced Coordinate Systems

• There are two possible solutions in the three-point, three-offset plane construction. Use the right hand rule to determine the correct offset direction.

• The CAD=PART function needs to be performed after the translation.

FIGURE 46-3 3 Point 3 Offset Plane

2

1

3

443Chapter 46: Advanced Coordinate System

Page 464: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 465: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

PRACTICAL EXERCISEStart with a new file and load the correct part preferences for this practical.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

FIGURE 47-1 Print with Datum Targets

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 47-2 Drawing Units

B

B

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWINGIS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TITLE

Armed with Quality

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

FINSH REQUIRED63

A

50 50

C1B1A1

B2A2

A310

C

B

135

35.35

445Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 466: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced C

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 47-3 Load Tolerances

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 47-4 FARO CAD Translator

446oordinate Systems Practical

Page 467: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 47-5 Adding CAD Parts

FIGURE 47-6 FARO_Demo_Part3.igs

447Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 468: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced C

Nominal Alignments on the CAD

Constructing Nominal Objects

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < NOMINAL.

2 ❑ Choose the direction of the plane.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• CAM2 Measure will create a plane with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the bottom surface to define a plane for Datum A. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 47-7 Construct XY Plane

• Click the LEFT mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points up.

• Click the RIGHT mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 47-8 Choose Direction Vector

• Label = PLANE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 47-9 Nominal Plane Results

448oordinate Systems Practical

Page 469: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

NOTE: Since a nominal line was selected only one point is required to define the line.

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will create a line with 2 points.

• Use the mouse to click a point on the bottom sur-face to define a line for Datum B. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 47-10 Construct X Axis

• Label = LINE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 47-11 Nominal Line Results

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click a point on the bottom sur-face to define a circle for Datum C. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 47-12 Construct X Intercept

449Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 470: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced C

NOTE: Since a nominal circle was selected only one point is required to define the circle.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Constructing a Nominal Alignment

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM > 3-2-1.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

NOTE: The coordinate system may not be correct. If the nominal line that defines the X axis is pointing in the wrong direction, flip the direction of the nominal line.

Flipping Vectors

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Select N_LINE001.

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 47-13 Nominal Circle Results

• Select a Plane = N_PLANE001.

• Direction of Plane= +XY.

• Line Defined axis = N_LINE001.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = N_CIRCLE001.

• Select NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 47-14 Nominal Coordinate System

450oordinate Systems Practical

Page 471: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Click the FLIP VECTOR button.

4 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Construct the Plane

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere A.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 47-15 Measure Sphere A

• Label = SPHERE_A.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button but-ton twice to reject. Then re measure the results.

FIGURE 47-16 Sphere Results

451Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 472: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced C

4 ❑ Measure Sphere D.

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE POINT.

7 ❑ Measure a surface point on top of the base near the A3 target.

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 47-17 Measure Sphere D

• Label = SPHERE_D.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 47-18 Sphere Results

• Take three or four points by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 47-19 Measure Surface Point

A310

452oordinate Systems Practical

Page 473: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Construct the Plane

Construct the XY plane with three offsets using the known Z values on the table.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < 3 OFFSETS.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange

• Label = SURFPT_A3.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 47-20 Point Results

Datum Features

X Y Z

M_SURFPT_A3 25.0

M_SPHERE_D 50.0 35.4

M_SPHERE_A -135.0 -50.0 35.4

• Select First Point = M_SPHERE_A.

• First Point Offset = 35.4.

• Select Second Point = M_SPHERE_D.

• Second Point Offset = 35.4.

• Select Third Point = M_SURFPT_A3.

• Third Point Offset = 25.0.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 47-21 Construct Plane 3 Offsets

453Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 474: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced C

The Z value of the Demo Part "slide-in" sphere is approximately 35.35 mm, the Z value of the "screw in" sphere is approximately 54.50 mm, and the Z value of the calibration sphere is approximately 50.00 mm.

the labels.

NOTE: There are two solutions to the constructed plane. Depending on the selection order of the features, the constructed plane will be above or below the features. Using the right hand rule, selecting a counter clockwise direction places the plane on one side, selecting clockwise direction puts it on the other side.

Construct the Line

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < 2 OFFSETS.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the line. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: There are two possible solutions to the 2 Offset line. The offset is to the right of the line looking from the first selected point to the second selected point. The location of the line depends on which point is selected first.

Complete the Coordinate System

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-

• Select a Plane = C_PLANE001.

• Select First Point = M_SPHERE_A.

• First Point Offset = -50.0.

• Select Second Point = M_SPHERE_D.

• Second Point Offset = 50.0.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 47-22 Construct Line 2 Offsets

454oordinate Systems Practical

Page 475: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2-1.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < TRANSLATION.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

• Select a Plane = C_PLANE001.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = C_LINE001.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = M_SPHERE_A.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 47-23 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• Select X Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• X Offset = 135.0.

• Select Y Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• Y Offset = 50.0.

• Select Z Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• Z Offset = -35.4.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 47-24 Translate Coordinate System

455Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 476: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced C

5 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD = PART.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

Verify Alignment

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select INSPECT XYZ.

• Verify that the origin is in the bottom left corner of the base by moving the probe over the part and watching the computer screen.

• Press the BACK button or the ESC key to end the command.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

3 ❑ Complete the missing data on the table. The initial known values given to you should be exact.

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS002.

• Nominal Coordinate System = N_COORDSYS001.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 47-25 CAD=Part Alignment

Datum Features

X Y Z

M_SURFPT_A3 25.0

M_SPHERE_D 50.0 35.4

M_SPHERE_A -135.0 -50.0 35.4

456oordinate Systems Practical

Page 477: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate how to use nominal and surface data to align a coordinate system. After completing this section, the student will know how to use the Feature and Surface Point Alignment.

This section covers several different types of best-fit, CAD-to-PART alignments. They vary from one another by the features that may be used and how the error is distributed in the alignment. The part datum structure and the goal of the measurement session determines the best alignment.

Feature AlignmentFeature alignment uses three point-reducible features to give a more exact alignment without best-fitting. The measurements are only as good as the alignment. An alignment with large error will yield poor measurement results.

When the alignment error is high, the measured alignment features do not match their nominals. The only way to troubleshoot high alignment error is to create an exact CAD to PART alignment. One of the easiest ways to do that is by doing a Feature alignment.

A Feature alignment is accomplished by selecting a Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary feature.

The Feature alignment takes the Primary feature and matches it with its nominal.

3

2

3

2

1

1

457Chapter 48: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

Page 478: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced C

Then it takes the Secondary Feature and rotates it into the line between the Primary nominal and the Secondary nominal.

Finally, CAM2 Measure X rotates the Tertiary feature about that same line until the tertiary feature is in the same plane as the Tertiary nominal.

3

2

32

1

3

3

1

2

2

458AD to PART Alignments

Page 479: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

The results are as follows:

• The Primary feature has zero deviation.

• The Secondary feature has deviation along the line from primary to secondary nominals.

• The Tertiary feature has deviation in the plane of all three nominal features.

Iterative Alignment with Surface PointsThe previous training courses introduce the Iterative, or Best Fit alignment. Those practical exercises use simple point reducible features. CAM2 Measure X is able to use Surface Points and an associated nominal surface for the alignment.

When using surfaces to align to a part, at least three surface regions that are roughly orthogonal to each other must be selected. The 3-2-1 requirement (plane, line, point) must be satisfied when arranging the surface points.

A minimum of 6 surface points should be taken when measuring a nominal surface for an alignment.

Iterative Alignment with Not Used ValuesWhen to Use This Technique

• When the print specifies that only some of the values are used for a particular datum.

• When one of the datums is a round slot that is parallel to a

coordinate axis. That coordinate axis is not used in the calculation.

• When a bore center line is used as a datum and the center line is parallel to a coordinate axis.

• When a surface that is parallel to a coordinate plane is used as a datum and no CAD surface is provided.

459Chapter 48: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

Page 480: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced C

• When one of the alignment features has a very High error in one or

two coordinate axis and there is enough information to fully constrain.

Watch Out!

If you don’t specify enough values for each coordinate axis, then the part will be under constrained. You must shoot for a 3-2-1 situation where:

At least 3 Points use one Axis (For example: X)

At least 2 Points use a second Axis (For example: Y)

At least 1 Point must use the last Axis (Z)

If the alignment is under constrained, then the alignment may flip because

there is more than one solution.

Due to best-fit limitations, at least one point must use all the coordinate axes.

Important Topics - Advanced CAD to Part Alignments

• The number of points selected in an Iterative alignment will have an impact on the processing time for the alignment.

• The Feature alignment error at each point may be viewed in Review Features.

• The surface point can fall off the surface causing the alignment error to grow larger rather than solving.

460AD to PART Alignments

Page 481: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

This section covers several different types of best-fit, CAD-to-PART alignments. They vary from one another by how the error is distributed in the alignment and the features that may be used.

REMEMBER: The alignment used will be determined by the part datum structure and the goal of the measurement session.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Feature Alignment1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 49-2 Load Tolerances

461Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 482: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

7 ❑ Select CIRCLE from the Add a Nominal drop-down window.

8 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

X Y Z Diameter

Circle 9 0.0 0.0 0.0 100.0

Circle 1 0.00 70.0 0.0 20.0

Circle 3 70.0 0.0 0.0 20.0

• X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 100.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-3 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Label = CIRCLE009.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 49-4 Circle results

462AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 483: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

12 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-5 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 49-6 Circle results

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-7 Construct Circle Enter Values

463Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 484: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

14 ❑ Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not been measured a plane; however, CAM2 has an option to DEFINE a plane during a 2D feature command.

15 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

16 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Label = CIRCLE003.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 49-8 Circle results

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-9 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-10 Measure XY Plane

464AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 485: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

17 ❑ Measure Circle 9.

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

19 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

20 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-11 Measure Circle 1

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-12 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-13 Measure XY Plane

465Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 486: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

21 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

22 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

23 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

24 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-14 Measure Circle 1

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-15 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-16 Measure XY Plane

466AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 487: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

25 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

26 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

27 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select FEATURE.

28 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

29 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

• Select M_CIRCLE009.

• View Style = Tabular.

• Enter the Deviation values for X, Y and Z into the following table.

• Repeat for M_CIRCLE001 and M_CIRCLE003.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-17 Measure Circle 3

• Primary Point = M_CIRCLE009_I.

• Secondary Point = M_CIRCLE001_I.

• Tertiary Point = M_CIRCLE003_I.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-18 Feature Alignment

Deviation X Deviation Y Deviation Z

M_CIRCLE009_I

M_CIRCLE001_I

467Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 488: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

NOTE: Circle 9 will have zero deviation, Circle 1 will have deviation along the Y axis, and Circle 3 will have deviation along the X and Y axis.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Surface Points

Secure the black plastic shell on top of the plate.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts

M_CIRCLE003_I

FIGURE 49-19 FARO Shell

Deviation X Deviation Y Deviation Z

FARO Standard Demonstration Part - ShellISO View

468AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 489: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

3 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE POINT.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = Shell1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 49-20 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = Shell1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 49-21 Adding CAD Parts

469Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 490: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

5 ❑ Measure point 1.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ Measure point 2.

• Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-22 Measure Surface Point

• Label = SURFPT001.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 49-23 Point Results

• Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-24 Measure Surface Point

1

2

470AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 491: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

9 ❑ Measure point 3.

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT002.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re-measure the fea-ture.

FIGURE 49-25 Point Results

• Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-26 Measure Surface Point

• Label = SURFPT003.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re-measure the fea-ture.

FIGURE 49-27 Point Results

3

471Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 492: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

11 ❑ Measure point 4.

12 ❑ Take a look at the results.

13 ❑ Measure point 5.

• Take three or four points on the surface by press-ing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-28 Measure Surface Point

• Label = SURFPT004.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re-measure the fea-ture.

FIGURE 49-29 Point Results

• Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-30 Measure Surface Point

4

5

472AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 493: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

14 ❑ Take a look at the results.

15 ❑ Measure point 6.

16 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT005.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re-measure the fea-ture.

FIGURE 49-31 Point Results

• Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-32 Measure Surface Point

• Label = SURFPT006.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re-measure the fea-ture.

FIGURE 49-33 Point Results

6

473Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 494: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

474

Using Surfaces as Nominals

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

3 ❑ Select M_SURFPNT001 through M_SURFPNT003.

4 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button .

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal surface.

6 ❑ Select M_SURFPNT004 through M_SURFPNT005.

7 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button .

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal surface.

9 ❑ Select M_SURFPNT006.

• Using the mouse select the surface on the top of the CAD model.

FIGURE 49-34 Surface 1

• Using the mouse select the surface on the side of the CAD model.

FIGURE 49-35 Surface 2

AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 495: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button ,

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal surface.

12 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

13 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

The alignment calculations stop when the smallest error, between the measured points and the nominal surfaces is found.

14 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

15 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

• Touch anywhere on the part and press the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the part and press the BACK button.

16 ❑ Take 2 more points on the FARO shell.

NOTE: Surface point alignment is appropriate when aligning to a part with

• Using the mouse select the surface on the side of the CAD model.

FIGURE 49-36 Surface 3

• Select M_SURFPNT001 through M_SURFPNT006.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-37 Iterative Alignment

475Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 496: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

less than three, or no point-reducible features that have CAD surfaces.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Not Used ValuesIn this case, the X value of circle 1, the Y value of circle 3 and 7, and the Z values of the surface points will be used to construct an alignment.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

5 ❑ From the FILE menu, select select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-38 Drawing Units

• From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 49-39 Load Tolerances

FIGURE 49-40 FARO CAD Translator

476AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 497: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

7 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 49-41 Adding CAD Parts

FIGURE 49-40 FARO CAD Translator

477Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 498: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

the screen.

Measurement Template

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

2 ❑ Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template.

FIGURE 49-42 FARO_Demo_Part4.igs

• From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select Circle.

• Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 49-43 Measurement Template

• Using the mouse click on Circle 1 of the CAD model.

FIGURE 49-44 Circle 1

478AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 499: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template.

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 will be highlighted red.

FIGURE 49-45 Circle 1 Results

• Using the mouse click on Circle 3 on the CAD model.

FIGURE 49-46 Circle 3

• Label = CIRCLE003.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 and Circle 3 will be high-lighted red.

FIGURE 49-47 Circle 3 Results

479Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 500: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

6 ❑ Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

8 ❑ Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and return to the Measurment Template.

9 ❑ Click OK to measure the three circles.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not

• Using the mouse click on Circle 7 on the CAD model.

FIGURE 49-48 Circle 7

• Label = CIRCLE007.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1, Circle 3 and Circle 7 will be highlighted red.

FIGURE 49-49 Circle 7 Results

FIGURE 49-50 Measurement Template

480AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 501: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

been measured. However; CAM2 has an option to define a plane during a 2D feature command.

10 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Notice that Circle 1 is highlighted red. This is to guide to the correct circle.

11 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

12 ❑ Measure circle 1.

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-51 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the FRONT button.

• Pull up off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-52 Measure XY Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-53 Measure Circle 1

481Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 502: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

14 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

15 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

17 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-54 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-55 Measure Circle 3

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-56 Select Plane

482AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 503: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

18 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

19 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

Using Surface Points

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT > SURFACE POINT.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the FRONT button.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-57 Measure Circle 7

• Take three or four points on the top surface by pressing the FRONT but-ton in a small triangular pattern.

• Pull off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-58 Surface Point 1

• Label = SURFPT001.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 49-59 Point Results

483Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 504: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

3 ❑ Continue measuring surface points.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ Continue measuring surface points.

• Take three or four points on the top surface by pressing the FRONT but-ton in a small triangular pattern.

• Pull off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-60 Surface Point 2

• Label = SURFPT002.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re-measure the point.

FIGURE 49-61 Point Results

• Take three or four points on the top surface by pressing the FRONT but-ton in a small triangular pattern.

• Pull off the surface and press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-62 Surface Point 3

484AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 505: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

8 ❑ Click the OK button to accept the nominal surface.

9 ❑ Click OK the exit REVIEW FEATURES.

• Label = SURFPT003.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button button twice to reject. Then re measure the fea-ture.

FIGURE 49-63 Point Results

• Select M_SURFPT001, M_SURFPT002, M_SURFPT003.

• Click on the NOM-INALS tab.

• Click on the FROM SCREEN but-

ton .

• Using the mouse select the surface on the top of the CAD model. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

FIGURE 49-64 Review Features

485Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 506: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

10 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

11 ❑ In the ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT USED VALUES dialog box, change the weights of the three circles.

NOTE: The surface points cannot be weighted. The nominal surface constrains the points to the surface normal to the surface.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the aligment.

NOTE: Neglecting the Z values of the measured circles will only consider their X and Y location for the Iterative alignment. The surface points lock the Z values.

• Select the M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE007_I, M_SURFPT001, M_SURFPT002, and M_SURFPT003.

• Set Weights = checked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-65 Iterative Alignment

• Left mouse click on the check marks to turn off the Y and Z values for M_CIRCLE001.

• Left mouse click on the check marks to turn off the X and Z values for M_CIRCLE003 and M_CIRCLE007.

• Click OK and wait for the alignment to solve.

FIGURE 49-66 Set Weights

486AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 507: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

487

Answer Key

1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mounting3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accepted4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . last4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . referenced11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hot keys12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . buttons12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Command29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Features29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Features30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Plane31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . surfaces45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . datum45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . several46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMM46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aligned46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . established47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . point reducible77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . measurements93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . same93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . changed93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . additional94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disturbed94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XY171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YZ171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XZ171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . perpendicular171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface Point172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Home in172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cosine error191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arcs191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . circles191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D lines191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . slots243 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deviation262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . infinite262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plane262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right angle262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plane262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interfere

Page 508: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . coordinate system262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nominal262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tolerances283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polylines283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offset284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . minimum284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sort295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automate295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target points295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . online295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offline295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . measurement instructions341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automate375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . program375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . quality375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . icon376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . location376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . green376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . red376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shadow387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . player388 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . first397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . convert397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trends398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . precision414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-1415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separate Origin415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perpendicular Intersect416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line-Line Intersect416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bore416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Plane417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Point417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MidPoint417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . relative441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offset457 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . exact459 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . orthogonal459 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . parallel459 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAD

Page 509: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

489

460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . under constrained460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flip460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . all

Page 510: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

490

Page 511: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004
Page 512: Faroarm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - February 2004

Contact Information

For Technical Support

World Wide Web site: www.faro.comE-mail: [email protected] Number: 800.736.2771

For Sales Inquiries

Electronic Product Catalog on www.faro.comE-mail: [email protected] Number: 800.736.0234, extension 2265

For Training or Technical Services

E-mail: [email protected] Number: 800.736.0234, extension 1111